Home

iS5 User Manual

1. a io OLN O HNN 9 88 100 E ll _ mon o mm STARVERT iS5 a 2 i el Q ig y l E 1 W2 270 10 63 319 2 12 57 256 6 10 10 W1 350 13 75 _ 1 311 12 24 y E es a ad fa for id Y Sella aleja A E yd a A A a TS a 5 a al Lo mm inches Frame HP Model Number W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 Frame 5 40 SV300i85 2 4 350 270 680 662 311 50 SV370iS5 2 4 13 78 10 63 28 77 26 06 12 25 Chapter 1 Installation m Frame 6 60 75HP 200V
2. 5 ze a mh e 00000000000000 are o SOOCOQOOOOMIA o SOOOOOOOOOOIMA Y SOOOU0000 nn a amp 2 OCOD _ UNO STARVERT iS5 S coi 0 8 C IIT e iS Q i w2 275 10 83 359 6 14 16 El E 261 10 44 a _ Wi 375 15 63 al ls 21 330 12 99 i E LE HEH E mm inches Frame HP Model Number Wi W2 H1 H2 D1 Frame 6 60 SV450iS5 2 397 275 780 760 5 330 75 SV550iS5 2 15 63 10 83 30 71 29 94 12 99 Chapter 1 Installation m Frame 7 60 100HP 400V T al LS m 00 aiani TIA OO 00 OOO 00 OUNAONOONOOONND DODO DOODO i _ ot o OOOICO000
3. A a R al E E ESAN gt OO gt 2 gt gt gt D gt fp i aoo e Le He a PT Ty mm inches Frame HP Model Number w1 W2 H1 H2 D1 1 SV008iS5 2 4 Frame 1 2 SV015iS5 2 4 150 130 284 269 156 5 3 SV022iS5 2 4 5 91 5 12 11 18 10 69 6 16 5 SV037iS5 2 4 Frame 2 7 5 SV055iS5 2 4 200 180 355 340 182 5 10 SV075iS5 2 4 7 87 7 09 13 98 13 39 7 19 Chapter 1 Installation E Frame 3 15 20 HP E Frame 4 25 30 HP kp a AH hp eat fi m m m mm inches Frame HP Model Number W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 Frame 3 15 SV110iS5 2 4 250 230 385 370 201 20 SV150iS5 2 4 9 84 9 06 15 16 14 57 7 91 Frame 4 25 SV185iS5 2 4 304 284 460 445 234 30 SV220iS5 2 4 11 97 11 18 18 11 17 52 9 21 Chapter 1 Installation m Frame 5 40 50HP
4. 1 0 EXT Option Group Lit when Option group is selected This group appears only when an Option Board is installed FU2 1 0 EXT Application Group Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 25 FUN2 28 Chapter 2 Operation 2 3 1 7 Segment Keypad Display 1 Parameter Group DRV FU1 FU2 1 0 EXT o O O O O Conn I ILILILILIL LI E SEES ani 3 Output Frequency during run P 9 Command Frequency during stop Display Description 1 Parameter Group Displays the parameter groups of DRV FU1 FU2 I O EXT COM APP groups Each LED is lit when its parameter group is selected and blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 20 DRV 21 DRV 22 DRV 23 DRV 24 and DRV 25 2 Parameter Code and Displays the code of a group Rotate the encoder knob to move through 0 99 codes Operating Status Displays the operation information First digit F Forward operation r Reverse operation Second digit d DC Braking J Jog Terminal Input 1 8 Step Frequency Input Displays the Step of the Auto operation Two digits mark the reference is lost PL Loss of Reference from the Option Board DPRAM fault rL Loss of Reference from the Option Board Communication network fault vL Loss of Analog Frequency Reference V1 0 10V IL Loss of Analog Frequency Reference l 4 20mA XL Loss of Reference from the Sub Board 3 Output Frequency Displays the Output Frequency during
5. Stop Button is used to stop the drive from running The Reset Button is used to reset Faults The LED blinks when there is a fault 2 2 1 LCD Keypad Display Chapter 2 Operation 2 Run Stop Source 3 Frequency Setting Source 1 Parameter group 4 Output Current 5 Parameter Code 6 Operating Status DRV T K 0 0 A 00 STP 0 00 Hz 7 Drive Output Frequency During Run Command Frequency During Stop Displays Description 1 Parameter Group Displays the parameter group There are DRV FU1 FU2 I O EXT COM APP groups 2 Run Stop Source Displays the source of motor Run and Stop K Run Stop using FWD REV buttons on keypad T Run Stop using control terminal input FX RX O Run Stop via option board 3 Frequency Setting Source Displays the source of command frequency setting K Frequency setting using keypad V Frequency setting using V1 0 10V or V1 terminal I Frequency setting using 4 20mA terminal U Up terminal input when Up Down operation is selected D Down terminal input when Up Down operation is selected S Stop status when Up Down operation is selected O Frequency setting via Option board X Frequency setting via Sub board J Jog terminal input 1 8 Step frequency operation During Auto operation 2 and 3 display the sequence number step 4 Output Current Displays the Output Current during operation 5 Param
6. The Difference Between the s the frequency reference signal correct Check the level of the input signal g the following parameter setting is correct Rotating Speed and Lower Limit Frequency FU1 24 Upper Limit Frequency FU1 25 Analog Frequency Gain I O 1 10 the Reference is gt s the input signal line influenced by external noise Use a shielded wire Too Large The Inverter Does Not Accelerate or Is the acceleration deceleration time is set too short a period of time Is the load too large Does Not Increase Decelerate s the Torque Boost FU1 27 28 value is too high that the current limit function and the stall prevention Smoothly function do not operate The Motor Current Is the load too large is Too High t Is the Torque Boost Value manual too high t s the Upper Limit Frequency FU1 25 value correct The Rotating Speed Is the load too large g the Torque Boost FU1 27 28 value too high that the stall prevention function FU1 59 60 does not operate The Rotating Speed Oscillates When the Inverter is Operating 1 Load inspection Is the load oscillating 2 Input signal inspection s the frequency reference signal oscillating 3 Other Is the wiring too long when the inverter is using V F control over 500m 185 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting amp Maintenance 8 4 How to Check Power Components Before checking the powe
7. 24 Code FU2 76 appears only when FU2 75 is set to Ext DB R 25 Code FU2 81 through FU2 90 appear only when one of I O 12 I O 14 is set to 2nd function 63 Chapter 5 Parameter List 5 4 Input Output Group I O Adj Keypad Zisplay Setting Renge Facto E Code Description Default During Page 7 Segment 7 Segment Run 1 0 00 Jump to Desired Code Jump code T displayed Not available Pe ea a Filtering Time Constant i l 1 0 01 i V1 filter 0 to 9999 ms 10 ms for V1 Signal Input E V1 Input Minimum 1 0 02 V1 volt x1 i 0 to 10 V 0 00 M Voltage i V1 freq y1 0 to FU1 20 Hz 0 0 Hz Frequency e Vi y1 0 150 9 0 Input Minimum Voltage i 1 0 03 Corresponding to V1 V1 Ce Maximum 110 04 V1 volt x2 i 0 to 10 V 10 00 V Ce Frequency e V1 freq y2 i 0 to FU1 20 60 00 Hz 0 05 Corresponding to V1 i V1 y2 0 150 pe Input Maximum Voltage i Pa Time Constant l filter i 0 to 9999 ms 10 EN mk coal Input E 0 07 ll Input Minimum Current Minimum Current curr x1 0 to 20 mA 4 00 4 00 mA Frequency i freq y1 i 0 to FU1 20 0 0 Hz 110 08 Corresponding to Input i y1 i 0 150 0 Minimum Current i 10 09 I Input Maximum Current curr x2 ae I fi 2 0 to FU1 20 60 00 Hz re i o FU1 z 1 0 10 Corresponding to Input a y2 i 0 150 100 Maximum Current j None Criteria for Analog Input i 110 11 Wire
8. Suitable For Use On A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than Table1 RMS Symmetrical Amperes 240V for 240V rated inverters 480V for 480V rated inverters Volts Maximum Table 1 RMS Symmetrical Amperes for S5 series Model Rating SV008iIS5 2 SVOO08IS5 4 SV015iS5 2 SV015iS5 4 SVO22iS5 2 SV022iS5 4 5 000A SV037iS5 2 SV037iS5 4 SVO55iS5 2 SVO55iS5 4 SVO75iS5 2 SVO75iS5 4 SV110iS5 2 SV110i55 4 SV150iS5 2 SV150iS5 4 SV185iS5 2 SV185iS5 4 SV220iS5 2 SV220iS5 4 SV3005iS5 2 SV300iS5 4 SV370iS5 2 SV370iS5 4 SV450iS5 2 SV450iS5 4 SV550iS5 2 SV550iS5 4 SV750iS5 4 10 000A 2 OVERLOAD PROTECTION IOLT IOLT inverter Overload Trip protection is activated at 150 of the inverter rated current for 1 minute and greater OLT Inverter shuts off its output when inverter output current exceeds its overload trip level for overload trip time OLT is selected when FU1 56 is set to Yes and activated at 120 of FU1 57 Motor rated current for 60 sec set in FU1 58 3 OVER SPEED PROTECTION Not Provided With Overspeed Protection 4 Risk of Electric Shock More than one disconnect switch may be required to de energize the equipment before servicing VI CONTENTS SAFE ANSTRUCTUON Sii AA A iS l USER SELECTION GUIDE IS5 SPECIFICATIONS ssssssssssssrssernnnesnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnan 3 CHAPTER T INSTALLATION coi ips 6 1 1 Inspectorii PA ooo a
9. select PID F Gain Feed Forward PID REF Display PID PID FBK Display PID upper limit fi Gain requency Limit Multi function input terminal P1 P6 setting Yh E PID Gain Output F PID Low Limit requency PID Band AE PID Band Co A o o gt o o a aR peo proc PI dis Band freq amp during Acceleration P Gain2 terminal P1 setting Term Clear 0 o gt K ao y gt K 2 H K x Kp A gt Ko PID Gain PID D Gain PID P2 Gain 112 Multi function input P6 CZD PID P Gain Scale PID P Gain proc PI mode Accel Decel wTarFreq Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 PID Wiring Example Power Supply O FX FWD Run Stop O RX REV Run Stop PID Control Selection 6 P1 Setting Open loop ommon Termina O CMc Terminal O VR Power for Speed Signal 12V 10mA QOM 24V z DA O V1 Speed Signal Input 0 10V 1kohm O 5G Common for VR V1 Reference Feed back Feedback 4 20mA AC220V 50 60 Hz 113 Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 FU2 69 Accel Decel Change Frequency FU2 Acc Dec ch F 69 0 00 Hz 69 0 Factory Default 0 00 Hz 0 This function is used to change Accel Decel ramp ata
10. Open collector cm Common terminal Common Terminal Multi function z for P4 6 input Less than 25V 50mA Power supply for VR speed signal 12V 10mA O Common terminal for Q1 Speed signal input v1 0 10V 1 kohm 30A Fault output relay Less than AC 250V 1A 08 Less than DC 30V 1A I Speed signal input 4 20mA 250 ohm Common terminal for VR V1 Multi function output relay Less than AC 250V 1A Less than DC 30V 1A Speed signal input 3 Factory setting Run Note 1 Main circuit O Control circuit 2 Output voltage is adjustable up to 12V 3 Three types of External speed signal input available V I V l Refer to Parameter list and description for more details 161 Chapter 7 Options 7 3 2 Terminal Configuration 24V DC O 24V Ground EA AY gt ar el Q1 exTG nc P4 P5 Pe CM NC GND v2 ami am2 VR GND 7 3 3 Terminal Description Section Terminal Name Description Used as the extended function of P1 P2 P3 Contact Input P4 P5 P6 Multi Function Input 10 12 1 0 14 CM Common Terminal Common terminal for P4 P5 P6 3 VR Power supply for V2 ___ DC voltage output terminal for V2 12V 10mA Analog Analog voltage or current input terminal for frequency reference or Frequency V2 Analog Voltage Input _joverride 0 10V DC 4 20mA Re
11. Yes No E 0 Hz Yes Yes Yes 150 ooo os es er f 30 Code APP 32 through APP 33 appears only when APP 01 is set to Draw Chapter 5 Parameter List 5 8 Sub Board Selection Guide According To Function i LCD Display Sub Board Type Function Description SUB A Board SUB B Board SUB C Board EXT 02 Multi function Input Terminal P4 P4 define 0 O ExT 03 Multifunction Input Terminal PS P5define EXT 04 Multi function Input Termina PE P define e ext os V2 Mode Selection V2mode ExT 06 Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal V2filter ExT 07 V2 Input Minimum Voltage V2votwi_ eo Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input EXT 08 E Minimum Voltage V2 freq y1 EXT 09 V2 Input Maximum Voltage V2votx2 EXT 40 preguency Corresponding to V2 Input V2 freq y2 Maximum Voltage ExT 14 Usage for Pulse Input Signal Fmode EXT 45 Pulse Input Signal Selection Fpuseset EXT 16 Encoder Pulse Selection pulsenum _EXT 47 Filtering Time Constant for Pulse Input Signal Ffit 6e ExT 18 Pulse Input Minimum Frequency Fpulsext EXT 19 Frequency Output corresponding to Pulse F freq y Input Minimum Frequency EXT 20 Pulse Input Maximum Frequenc Fpulsex2 feo eam IN CI FS Input Maximum Frequency EXT 22 P GainforPG Option PGPga
12. 2004 6 Ratings Frequency 50 60 Hz 5 Braking Circuit Optional Braking Unit Resistor Max Braking Dynamic Torque Braking Max Continuous 20 Continuous Baking Time Max Duty Weight kg 45 45 63 63 68 When applying input voltage of 507 528 V range derate the load 10 For example when applying 507 V to 5 5kW inverters rated current 12A the max rated output current would be 10 8A calculated by multiplying 12A by 0 9 90 6 Same as above Control Method V F Control Sensorless Vector Control Sensored Vector Control Velocity Torque Selectable Frequency Setting Digital Reference 0 01 Hz Below 100 Hz 0 1 Hz Over 100 Hz Resolution Analog Reference 0 03 Hz 60 Hz O Frequency Accuracy Digital 0 01 of Max Output Frequency 5 Analog 0 1 of Max Output Frequency 3 VIF Ratio Linear Squared Pattern User V F Overload Capacity 150 of Rated Current for 1 Min 200 of Rated Current for 0 5 sec Characteristic is Inversely Proportional to Time Torque Boost Manual Torque Boost 0 15 Auto Torque Boost Operation Method Key Terminal Communication Operation Frequency Setting Analog 0 10V 4 20mA Additional port for Sub Board 0 10V Digital Keypad __ Start Signal Forward Reverse af Multi Step Up to 8 Speeds can be Set Use Multi Function Terminal 2 Multi Step
13. Control terminal V1 Voltage analog input 0 to 10V See the description of I O 01 05 Control terminal I Current analog input 4 to 20mA See the description of I O 06 10 Control terminal V1 l 0 10V 4 20mA Analog input See the description of I O 01 10 e Command Freq Torque setting via V1 input terminal when set DRV 04 Frequency Torque mode to 2 V1 or 4 V1 Code Default setting Setting range 1 0 01 10 msec 0 10000 msec 1 0 02 0 V 0 10 M 1 0 03 0 Hz 0 Max freq 1 0 04 10 V 0 10 M 1 0 05 60 Hz 0 Max freq Chapter 6 Parameter Description DRV Code Keypad Display Parameter Name 0 01 VA filter Filter pa ss Hi for V1 ues ees sina CRE Rear Coneoeg 1 0 04 V1 volt x2 V1 Input Maximum Voltage yoos viteaye career Important Increase 1 0 01 Filter Time Constant for V1 Signal Input if the V1 signal is affected by noise causing unstable operation Increasing this value makes response time slower Set freq V1 analog input 0 10V 110 04 V1 Maximum V 1 0 02 V1 Minimum V 1 0 06 10 Analog Current Input Signal adjustment e Command Freq Torque setting via I input terminal when set DRV 04 Frequency Torque mode to 3 1 or 4 V1 l Code Default setting Setting range 1 0 06 10 msec 0 10000 msec 1 0 07 4 mA 0 20 mA 1 0 08 0
14. Reference Reference Frequency versus Analog Voltage Input Curve can be made by four parameters of EXT 07 EXT 10 13 Y Chapter 6 Parameter Description EXT EXT V2 filter 06 10 06 10 ms Factory Default 10 ms 10 This is the filtering time constant for V2 signal input If the V2 signal is affected by noise causing unstable operation of the inverter increase this value Increasing this value may make response time slower EXT V2 volt x1 07 0 00 V 07 0 00 Factory Default 0 00 V 0 00 This is the minimum voltage of the V2 input at which the inverter outputs minimum frequency EXTP V2 volt yl 08 0 00 Hz 08 Factory Default 0 00 Hz 0 00 This is the minimum frequency the inverter outputs when there is the minimum voltage EXT 07 on the V2 terminal EXT V2 volt x2 09 0 00 V 09 10 00 Factory Default 10 00 V 10 00 This is the maximum voltage of the V2 input at which the inverter outputs maximum frequency EXTP V2 volt y2 10 60 00 Hz 10 60 00 Factory Default 60 00 Hz 60 00 This is the maximum frequency the inverter outputs when there is the maximum voltage EXT 09 on the V2 terminal Chapter 6 Parameter Description EXT Reference Frequency Code LCD Display Setting in Feed back t EXT 12 F mode Feed back ex EXT 15 F pulse set A B EXT 16 F pulse num 360
15. by UNIT N MAX i ON O O O O OHT POWER RUN LS 8 TL fu i uy 125 125 jis 05 L 150 177 Chapter 7 Options 172 68 5 Chapter 7 Options e Group 2 Dynamic Braking Unit 231 5 12 178 27 e Group 3 4 M5 Mounting y Dynamic Braking Unit WIRING O Power PP mera oda itp O ont uN a oct A tioni jE orenen anene Rend the manual and follow the soley Chapter 7 Options 123 179 130 Chapter 7 Options 5 Monitoring LEDs Group 1 O O O OHT POWER RUN Group 2 Group 3 LED Description OHT When heat sink is overheated and the level exceeds its setting GREEN limit overheat protection is activated and OHT LED is turned ON LEFT after DBU s signal is shut off POWER POWER LED is turned ON upon inverter Power ON because RED normally it is connected to the inverter GREEN RUN LED is b
16. the inverter will restart after power is restored If the motor is rotating by inertia at the time power is restored the inverter may trip To avoid this trip use Speed Search function by setting FU2 22 to 1xxx Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 Output Frequenc s Input Power P A y A gt Time Output de aie FX CM ON EN gt Time E gt Time rea Start 3 RST CM En gt Time A i lo N Reset restart No FX CM ON ON gt Time Reset restart No Power ON Start No Output Frequency A Input Power A gt Time E gt Time i Output Frequency EE A A D FX CM EN gt Time A RST CM ON gt Time gt Time Reset restart Yes A SS FX CM ON l gt Time Note In case of using Reset Restart to Yes make sure Power ON Start Yes to utilize appropriate warning notices to minimize the potential for injury or equipment damage Note In case of using Power ON Start to Yes make f sure to utilize appropriate warning notices to minimize the Related Functions _FU2 22 FU2 25 Speed Search potential for injury or equipment damage FU2 22 Speed Search Selection Bit Set FU2 23 Current Limit Level During Speed Search FU2 21 Restart After Fault Reset FU2 24 P Gain During Speed Search FU2 25 Ga
17. 0 45 Fault Output Relay 30A 30B 30C I O Relay mode 45 010 45 010 Factory Default 010 010 This function is used to allow the fault output relay to operate when a fault occurs The output relay terminal is 30A 30B 30C where 30A 30C is a normally open contact and 30B 30C is a normally closed contact Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O This code sets the communication speed This is used in communication between inverter and communication board 1 0 48 Operating at Loss of Freq Reference 110 49 Waiting Time after Loss of Freq Reference Bit ES Display Description 0 000 Fault output relay does not Bit 0 operate at Low voltage trip LV j 001 Fault output relay operates at Low voltage trip 0 000 Fault output relay does not Bit 1 operate at any fault Trip Fault output relay operates at 1 010 any fault except Low voltage and BX inverter disable fault Fault output relay does not 0 000 operate regardless of the retry Bit 2 number Retry Fault output relay operates 1 100 when the retry number set in FU2 26 decreases to O by faults t When several faults occurred at the same time Bit 0 has the first priority Related Functions DRV 12 Fault Display FU2 26 Retry number 1 0 46 Inverter Number 1 0 47 Baud Rate 1 0 Inv No 46 Factory Default 1 This code sets the inverter number This numbe
18. 4096 EXT 22 PG P gain 0 30000 EXT 23 PG I gain 0 30000 EXT 24 PG Slip Freq 0 200 EATI EXT 25 ASR P Gain 10 500 o 05 gt eye EXT 26_ ASR l Gain 10 9999 mSec EXT 27 Trq Limit 0 200 EXT 28 Trq Limit 0 200 Reference Frequency vs Analog Voltage Input V2 0 to 10V Reference Related Functions DRV 04 Frequency Mode The encoder pulse signal is used as the frequency 1 0 01 0 05 V1 Adjustment reference When this function is selected the frequency reference selected in DRV 04 is ignored Reference Frequency versus Pulse Input Curve can be made by EXT 12 Usage of Pulse Input Signal Sub B EXI F mode four parameters of EXT 18 EXT 21 12 None 12 0 Code LCD Display Setting in Reference Factory Default None 0 EXT 12 F mode Reference NA EXT 15_ F pulse set A This unetion is hal select the usage of encoder pulse EXT 17 F filter 0 10000 msec signal of Sub B board The pulse signal from encoder EXT 18 F pulse x1 0 10 kHz can be used as the motor speed feedback or frequency EXT 19 F freq y 0 Max Freq Hz reference EXT 20 F pulse x2 0 10 kHz EXT 21 F freq y2 0 Max Freq Hz None The encoder pulse signal is not used Reference Frequency Feed back The encoder pulse signal is used as the motor speed feedback The inverter can maintain the motor speed constantly regardless of the load fl
19. Drive mode Run Stop via FX RX Wiring d B2 y v 1st motor w b o 2 97 nd i xi i motor FX FM rro RX 5G 1st 2nd motor BX Switch over 1st 2nd motor one o select 30B Ai AXA AXC amp Step Parameter setting Code Description 1 Control Mode Selection FU2 39 Setit to 0 V F 2 Drive mode DRV 3 Setit to Fx Rx 1 3 Frequency Mode setting DRV 4 Set it to 0 keypad 1 1st motor freq setting 4 Multi function input terminal P2 1 0 13 Set P2 to 2nd Func 5 Multi function input terminal P1 1 0 12 Set P1 to Speed L 274 motor freq setting 6 Freq setting for 1st motor DRV 0 Set it to 50 Hz Accel Decel time setting for 1s DRV 1 7 motor DRV 2 Set Accel Decel time to 15 sec 25 sec 8 Freq setting for 2nd motor DRV 5 Setit to 10 Hz j j nd 9 A lime seuing fore FU2 81 82 Set Accel Decel time to 30 sec 50 sec 40 ds motor operation Set it as main motor by turning P1 P2 output relay OFF p Run the motor in FWD REV direction using FX RX terminal Set 2n4 motor parameters by turning terminal P2 ON Change the freq setting to 20 Hz by turning terminal P1 ON nd n Pamor Operation Change 2 motor terminal by turning output relay ON Run the motor in FWD REV direction by terminal FX RX 48 Chapter 3 Function Settings Operation Example 4 Sensorless_S Control Multi speed operati
20. FU2 Rs 41 0 171 ohm a 0 111 Factory Default 0 171 ohm 0 1 FU2 Lsigma 42 3 34 mH 42 3 34 Factory Default 3 34 mH FU2 gt Ls 43 29 03 mH 43 29 03 Factory Default 29 03 mH 29 03 Tr 260 ms FU2 da 260 Factory Default 260 ms Note These values are automatically entered according to the FU2 30 Rated motor selection The above values are displayed when FU2 30 is set to 5 7 5 kW The auto tuning function automatically measures the motor parameters needed for control selected in FU2 39 Control mode selection such as stator resistance rotor resistance leakage inductance no load current and Encoder feedback frequency The motor does not rotate during auto tuning so there is no need to separate the motor from the system Encoder operating status can be checked The rated current voltage efficiency and slip described in the motor nameplate should be entered before performing auto tuning If efficiency is not indicated on the nameplate use the preset value e Allor selected parameters can be tuned in Auto tuning mode 108 Motor rotation mode when set to All Enc Test Tr 1 With PG Option installed if FU2 40 is set to All Stator resistance Rs Leakage inductance Lsigma Stator inductance Ls No load current Noload Curr Speed Encoder status and Rotor constants Tr are calculated 2 Without PG Option installed if FU2 40 is set to All Stator re
21. Note There are WDOG error EEP error and ADC Offset for the inverter Hardware Fault and the inverter will not reset when H W fault occurs Repair the fault before turning on the power Note When multiple faults occur only the highest level fault will be displayed fault status No Factory Default No Erase trips DRV 12 Fault Display displays current This function erases all fault histories of FU2 01 to FU 05 from the memory Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 FU2 07 Dwell Frequency FU2 08 Dwell Time FU2 10 FU2 16 Frequency Jump FU2 Dwell freq 07 5 00 Hz 07 5 00 Factory Default 5 00 Hz 5 00 FU2 Dwell time 08 0 0 sec 08 0 0 Factory Default 0 0 sec 0 0 This function is used to output torque in an intended direction It is useful in hoisting applications to get enough torque before a releasing mechanical brake If the dwell time is set at 0 this function is not available In dwell operation the inverter outputs AC voltage not a DC voltage Note DC Injection Braking does not output torque to an intended direction It is just to hold the motor Note Do not set the Dwell frequency above run frequency Otherwise it may lead to operation fault Output Frequency FU1 07 gt Time t1 t1 FU2 08 Dwell Time Output Current ja Run Command A g FX CM ON gt Time Mechanical Brake Release g
22. o 1 0 1 0 I gt Time Freq 5 Step JOG and Multi Step Operation 0 23 0 1 1 0 0 Freq 6 Step a erez PB O25 10 38 15 7 AccellDecel Time da 0 85 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 A ti 1 z GG LMS Freq 8 25 20 0 sec 25 20 00 ee 0 86 1 0 0 1 0 Freq 9 Factory Default 20 0 sec 20 0 Step 0 87 1 0 1 0 0 Freq 10 Step 0 88 1 0 1 1 0 Freq 11 ses 0 89 1 1 0 0 0 I O Dec time 7 SS 38 20 0 sec MEN 20 0 90 1 1 0 1 0 Freq 13 Factory Default 20 0 sec 20 0 Step PRAP Freq 14 0 91 1 1 1 0 0 These codes are applied when the multi function input a terminals P1 P2 P3 select the Accel Decel time See Freq 15 10 92 1 1 1 1 0 XCEL L XCEL M XCEL H in 1 0 12 1 0 14 7 0 OFF 1 ON X Jog Related Functions DRV 01 DRV 02 Accel Decel Time Speed X The highest speed input bit used when one of FU2 70 Reference Freq for Accel Decel RST BX JOG FX RX set to Speed X FU2 71 Accel Decel Time Scale 1 0 12 1 0 14 Multi function inputs t 1 0 20 Jog Frequency can be used as one of the step frequencies 127 Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O 1 0 40 FM Frequency Meter Output 1 0 41 FM Adjustment FM Terminal Output 1 0 FM mode 40 0 40 Frequency Factory Default Frequency 0 poo 0 10V 1 O FM Adjust ve 41 100 M 100 Factory Default 100 100 Frequency meter displays the inverter output Frequency Current Voltage and DC link voltage with pulse signals on th
23. 20 0 sec Yes 127 for Step Frequency i Deceleration Time 1 1 0 26 Dec time 1 a 0 to 6000 sec 0 1 20 0 sec for Step Frequency i 0 27 Acceleration Time 2 Acc time 2 1 0 28 _ Deceleration Time 2 Dec time 2 0 to 6000 sec 30 0 sec Yes 1 10 29 Acceleration Time 3 Acc time 3 e 0 to 6000 sec 0 1 40 0 sec S 65 Chapter 5 Parameter List cade onion IDE tt Factory Code Description i Default During Page 7 Segment 7 Segment Run Dec time3 Acctime4 Dec time 4 Acctime5 Dec time5 Acctime6 10 36 Dec time 6 10 37 Ace time 7 10 38 Dec time 7 Frequency Current FM Frequency Meter i i FM mode Voltage Frequency Yes Output Selection 128 DC link Vtg Torque 10 41 FM Output Adjustment FM adjust E 10 to 200 100 Y Yes Frequency Detection i 110 42 sia FDT freq 0 to FU1 20 0 01 30 00 Hz Yes i 128 Frequency Detection 1 0 43 i FDT band 0 to FU1 20 0 01 10 00 Hz Yes Bandwidth i oO AN DOF WwW NY O N N NNN NEN 2 o A N gt O O DAN DO FP WwW NY O e Lost Command e Multi Function Auxiliary Bin 110 44 Contact Output Define Auxmode E Yes 129 AXA AXC Stop i Steady e INVIine COMM line Ssearch Step pulse Seq pulse Ready Tv ACC Tv DEC Zspd Dect i Torq Dect i 66 Chapter 5 Parameter List Keypad Displa Factory Adi Code Description ye p y 2 g oie During Pa
24. Dwell operation eee while running at Dwell frequency FU2 07 and starts acceleration at commanded frequency Setting FU2 08 Dwell time to 0 disable the Dwell operation When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped Up FU2 10 l Frequency jump FU2 11 16 to three areas can be set with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area To enable the function set FU2 10 to Yes and set the value in FU2 11 FU2 16 This pattern has an effect on the prevention of cargo FU2 17 FU2 18 collapse on conveyor etc and reduction in an acceleration deceleration shock S curve Accel Decel pattern 41 Chapter 3 Function Settings 2 Sensorless vector control Related parameters for starting in Sensorless vector control when FU2 39 Control Mode Selection is set to 2 Sensorless_S Status Code Description FU1 14 Pre excitation time setting Men stating yO12 14 oa EXT2 4 Multi function input terminal P1 P6 define 3 Vector control Vector_SPD Vector_TRQ Related parameters for running stopping in Vector control when FU2 39 Control Mode Selection is set to 4 Vector_SPD Status Code Description FU1 14 Pre excitation time setting Whemsianng yo12 14 eer EXT2 4 Multi function input terminal P1 P6 define Pre excitation current FU1
25. Erase Fault History FU2P Last trip 1 01 None 01 0 Factory Default None 0 FU2 Last trip 5 05 None 05 0 Factory Default None 0 This code displays up to five previous fault trip status of the inverter Use the PROG A and Y key before pressing the RESET key to check the fault content s output frequency output current and whether the inverter was accelerating decelerating or in constant speed at the time of the fault occurred Press the ENT key to exit The fault content will be stored in FU2 01 through FU2 05 when the RESET key is pressed For more detail please refer to Chapter 7 Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 Fault Contents Keypad Displa Faut Unip LCD Sean Over Current 1 Over Current 1 oc Over Voltage Over Voltage OV External Trip Input A External A EXTA Emergency Sto Not latched i BX BX Low Voltage Low Voltage LV Fuse Open Fuse Open FUSE Ground Fault Ground Fault GF Over Heat on Heat sink Over Heat OH Electronic Thermal Trip E Thermal ETH Over Load Trip Over Load OLT Inverter H W Fault EEP Error ADC Offset HW Diag HW WDOG Error In Phase Open External Trip Input B External B EXTB Over Current 2 Arm Short ASHT Option Error Option OPT Output Phase Loss Phase Open PO Inverter Over Load Inv OLT IOLT Related Functions
26. FU2 28 ISS blk time hold time during 1 sec 0 60sec Ifyou do not set these values inverter will use its default speed search values 104 FU2 gt Motor select 30 0 759kW 30 0 Factory Default 0 75 kW 0 This value is set according to the inverter model automatically This parameter sets the motor capacity Other motor related parameters are changed automatically according to motor capacity The motor related parameters are FU2 32 Rated Motor Slip FU2 33 Rated Motor Current FU2 34 No Load Motor Current FU2 42 Stator Resistance FU2 43 Rotor Resistance and FU2 44 Leakage Inductance If you know the motor parameters set the values in the relevant codes for better control performance FU2 Pole number AE 4 Factory Default 4 4 This is used to display the motor speed If you set this value to 2 inverter will display 3600 rpm instead 1800rpm at 60Hz output frequency See motor nameplate W Eh FU2 Rated Slip 32 3 00 Hz 32 3 00 Factory Default 3 00 Hz 3 00 This is used in Slip Compensation control If you set this value incorrectly motor may stall during slip compensation control See motor nameplate FU2 gt Rated Curr 33 3 6 A 33 Factory Default 3 6 A 3 6 This value is set according to the motor capacity set in FU2 30 This is very importance parameter that must be set correctly This value is referenced in many other inverter parameters See motor nameplate FU2 gt
27. Hinode 66o0cF30 iS5 2 Elec 5 5 3VO55 40 500 50 220 60 250 Hinode 250FH 60 iS5 2 Elec 7 5 5V075 50 500 60 220 60 250 Hinode 250FH 60 iS5 2 Elec SV110 Hinode EE A 70 500 100 220 125 250 mode 250GH 125 CLASS 45 SV150 400 500 100 220 150 250 Hinode 250GH 150 iS5 2 Elec 18 5 3V185 400 500 225 220 175 250 Hinode 250GH 175 iS5 2 Elec 22 5Y220 425 500 225 220 225 250 Hinode 250GH 225 iS5 2 Elec SV300 Hinode 250GH E 150 500 225 220 250 250 ies aan SV370 Hinode 250GH a eee 220 500 225 220 250 250 i Seon SV450 Hinode 250GH a5 So 270 500 300 220 350 250 Ui et 3V550 Hinode 250GH A ee 330 500 350 220 350 250 Hi ck 0 75 SV008 10 500 30 460 10 eoo Hinode 66socF10 iS5 4 Elec 4 5 SV015 10 500 30 460 10 600 Hinode 60cF10 iS5 4 Elec 22 5V022 15 500 30 460 15 600 Hinode ggocF15 S5 4 Elec 3 7 SV037 20 500 30 460 15 600 Hinode 66ocf15 S5 4 Elec 5 5 SV055 20 500 30 460 35 600 Hinode 660GH 35 iS5 4 Elec 7 5 5V075 30 500 30 460 35 600 Hinode 660GH 35 iS5 4 Elec 41 57110 35 500 50 460 63 eoo Hinode 660GH 63 iS5 4 Elec 400V 3V150 Hinode e cis 45 500 60 460 80 600 mode 660GH 80 18 5 3V185 60 500 100 460 100 eoo Hinode 660GH 100 iS5 4 Elec 22 SVY220 70 500 100 460 125 eoo Hinode 660GH 125 iS5 4 Elec 30 S 300 199 500 100 460 125 eoo Hinode go0FH 125S iS5 4 Elec 37 SV370 4
28. It is recommended to use the torque boost function when a greater starting torque is required Related function FU1 26 28 Torque boost e Slip compensation This function is used to maintain constant motor speed To keep the motor speed constant the output frequency varies within the limit of slip frequency set in FU2 32 according to the load current For example when the motor speed decreases below the reference speed frequency due to a heavy load the inverter increases the output frequency higher than the reference frequency to increase the motor speed The inverter increases or decreases the output by delta frequency shown below Delta freq Rated slip Output current Motor No load current rated current Motor No load current Output freq Reference freq Delta freq Note Motor parameters must be set correctly for optimal performance of control FU2 32 36 Motor related parameters is automatically determined by FU2 30 Rated Motor selection Most suitable motor capacity corresponding inverter capacity is set as factory setting but the following setting value can be adjusted if necessary Related parameter FU2 30 37 Motor related parameters 200V 400V 30 37kW 40 50HP 10kHz 10kHz 45 55kW 60 75HP 8kHz 8kHz 75kW 100HP 7kHz Max carrier frequency for DB integrated models 11 22kW 15 30HP is 10kHz FU2 39 Control mode selection FU2mControl mode 39 V F 39 0 F
29. Noload Curr 34 1 8 A 34 1 8 Factory Default 1 8 A 18 This value is set according to the motor capacity set in FU2 30 This parameter is only displayed when Slip Compen is selected in FU2 40 Control Method This function is used to maintain constant motor speed To keep the motor speed constant the output frequency varies within the limit of slip frequency set in FU2 32 according to the load current For example when the motor speed decreases below the reference speed frequency due to a heavy load the inverter increases the output frequency higher than the reference frequency to increase the motor speed The inverter increases or decreases the output by delta frequency shown below Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 Output current No load current Delta _ x Rated Slip Freq Rated current No load current Output frequency Reference freq Delta freq FU2 gt Motor Volt 35 9 33 Factory Default This value is set according to the motor capacity set in FU2 30 FU2 gt Efficiency 36 12 36 12 Factory Default 72 12 This value is set according to the motor capacity set in FU2 30 This value is used for calculating the output wattage when FU2 72 is set to Watt FU2 gt Inertia rate a 7 37 0 Factory Default 0 0 This parameter is used for sensorless control minimum Accel Decel optimum Accel Decel and speed search For better control perf
30. P2 P3 Speed L Speed M Speed H Output Frequency Step Speed 0 0 o DRV 00 Speed 0 Reference Freq Range 1 0 0 DRV 05 Speed 1 0 1 0 DRV 06 Speed 2 Analog Signal 1 1 0 DRV 07 Speed 3 OV 4mA 10V 20mA Oe Output Frequency Freq Mode V1 1 t Speed 0 Speed 3 Related functions DRV 00 Digital Command Frequency or Speed 2 Command Torque Speed 1 FU2 39 Control Mode Selection gt Time 1 0 01 10 Analog Voltage Current input A E E E signal adjustment P1 CM ON ON R gt Time P2 CM ON l A gt Time RGM gt Time Step Frequency Output 83 Chapter 6 Parameter Description DRV Related Functions 1 0 12 to I O 14 Reference Inputs 1 0 17 Filtering Time Constant 1 0 21 to 1 0 21 Step Frequency 4 7 1 0 01 to 1 0 10 Scaling the analog input signals V1 and l for frequency reference a to eliminate contact noise M 0 21 to I O 24 Sets the step frequency from 4 to 7 Note The frequency setting method of Speed 0 is decided by DRV 04 1 0 17 Adjusts the response sensibility of the input terminal DRV 08 Output Current DRV Current 08 0 0 A 08 Factory Default 0 0 A 0 0 This code displays the output current of the inverter in RMS DRV 09 Motor Speed DRV Speed 09 Orpm 09 0 Factory Default Ormp 0 This code displays the motor
31. Yes 115 Chapter 5 Parameter List Keypad Displa Factory Adi Code Description ve P y y 7 y Reet During Page 7 Segment 7 Segment Run None DB Dynamic Braking DB mode Int DB R Int DB R Yes 115 Resistor Mode Selection Ext DB R i Duty of Dynamic Brakin FU2 7624 E E y 9 DB ED 0 to 30 10 esistor S W version eras tt 2nd Acc time 2nd Deceleration Time 2nd Dec time 2nd Base Frequency 2nd BaseFreq Linear E VIF Pattern 2nd V F Square Linear No User V F 2nd Forward Torque Boost 2nd F boost 0 to 15 2 0 na 2nd Reverse Torque 116 Boost 2nd R boost 0 to 15 0 1 2 0 No 00s FU2 87 2 Stall Prevention Level 2nd Stall 30 to 150 150 2nd Electronic Thermal FU2 88 f 2nd ETH 1min FU2 89 to 200 150 Y Yes Level for 1 minute 1 2nd Electronic Thermal 50 to FU2 88 2nd ETH cont 1 100 Yes Level for continuous Maximum 150 2 n Rated Motor Current 2nd R Curr 1 to 200 A 3 6 A HENO 116 OHIO 1 0 No No 117 EXT Parameter Write i Para Lock 0 to 255 1 Yes 117 Protection FU2 99 Return Code Not displayed Not available Write Parameters to Para Write Read Parameters into FU2 91 Para Read Keypad from Inverter FU2 92 Inverter from Keypad No All Groups DRV Initialize Parameters Para Init FU FU2 on fF 0 DN gt Oje Ol O t Note FU2 41 42 43 44 45 46 not displayed when FU2 39 is set to V f or Slip compen
32. the running motor and changes motor to run by the order set in APP 26 and then continues operation according to new order If Auto Change Level APP 28 is set to 0 the function is initiated only when the motor is in Stop or Sleep state The count time for Auto Change is depend on Auto Wiring Diagram for Inter Lock Configuration Change Mode APP 26 In mode 0 inverter starts counting only when auxiliary motor is running In mode 1 or 2 inverter starts counting when any motor is 230VAC running including main motor APP 29 Inter Lock Selection APP Inter lock 29 No 29 0 Factory Default No 0 By setting this code to Yes the multi function input terminals P1 P4 are used as auxiliary motor operating condition of RLY1 RLY2 RLY3 and AUX The multi function input terminal should be turned on to run the corresponding auxiliary motor If running with M1 iS5 M1 main M2 iS5 any multi function input terminal open with this function the inverter starts motors except the corresponding Sequence Circuit for Inter Lock Configuration motor If multi function input happens to be turned off during motor running the inverter stops all running motors and restarts running with only normal motors APP 27 Auto Change Time except the subject motor By setting this parameter to APP 28 Auto Change Level Yes the multi function input terminals P1 P4 are set to Interlock1 throug
33. 0 0 A 00 STP 60 00Hz Note To enable Run Stop via keypad amp Freq setting via control terminal Setting DRV 03 Drive Mode Run Stop method 0 Keypad DRV 04 Frequency Mode Freq setting method 2 V1 33 Chapter 2 Operation Operation ie Example 1 Freq Setting via Keypad Run Stop via Terminal FX RX Operation condition Control mode V F control Ref Frequency 50 Hz setting via keypad Accel Decel time Accel 10 Sec Decel 20 Sec Drive mode Run Stop via FX RX terminal Wiring o e PEA B1 B2 AC 0 0 0 S V M inputd oo T w e re G S W oO FX FM oso RX BX 5G RST JOG 30A P1 30C EE 308 P3 CM AXA Potentiometer AXC 1 kohm 1 2W A vi 5G Step Parameter setting Code Description 1 Control Mode Selection FU2 39 Set it to 0 V F 2 Drive Mode DRV 3 Set it to 1 Fx Rx 1 3 Frequency Mode DRV 4 Set it to 0 Keypad 1 4 eta freg command DRV 0 Set freq command 50 Hz via Keypad setting 5 Accel Decel time DRV 2 Set Accel time to 10 Sec in DRV 2 DRV 3 Set Decel time to 20 Sec in DRV 3 Motor starts to rotate in Forward direction at 50Hz with Accel time 10 sec when FX terminal is turned ON Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25 sec when FX terminal is turned OFF When RX terminal is turned ON motor starts to rotate in Reverse 7 Terminal RX direction at 50 Hz with Accel time 10 Hz When it is OFF
34. 180 EXT PG P gain Factory Default 180 180 2000 IS 3000 y This is the Forward Torque Limit when the control mode This is the proportional gain when the EXT 14 is set to is set to Sensored Vector_SPD Feed back Factory Default 50 50 EXT 28 Torque Limit EXT PG I gain EXT Trq Limit 23 50 23 30 28 180 3 28 180 Factory Default 180 180 This is the integral gain when the EXT 14 is set to Feed back This is the Reverse Torque Limit when the control mode is set to Sensored Vector_SPD EXT 24 Slip Frequency for Sub B Board Factory Default 100 100 EXT 30 lend EXT 32 Multi Function Output Terminal Q1 Q2 Q3 Define Sub A Sub C EXTPPG Slip Freq 24 100 24 100 Q1 Q2 Q3 terminals are provided on Sub A and Sub C board as an open collector output The functions of these terminals can be selected the same as 1 0 44 Multi function Auxiliary Contact Output Define This is the limit frequency the inverter uses to compensate the motor speed drop due to load fluctuation The set point value is the percentage of FUN 32 Rated Motor Slip EXI Q1 define 30 0 30 FDT 1 EXT 25 Sensored Vector_SPD P Factory Default aa 0 EXTP ASR P Gain 25 100 25 100 EXT 02 define 31 FDT 2 31 1 Factory Default 100 100 This is the proportional gain when the control mode is Factory Default FDT 2 1 set to Sensored Vector_SPD Adjust the ga
35. 30 37 kW SV370DBU 2 Group 2 Non UL 200V 45 55 kW SV550DBU 2 See 4 Dimensions E 400V 11 15 kW SV150DBU 4 Group 1 dd 400V 18 5 22 kW SV220DBU 4 See 4 Dimensions 400V 30 37 kW SV370DBU 4 Group 2 400V 45 55 kW SV550DBU 4 l See 4 Dimensions 400V 75 kW SV750DBU 4 200V 11 15 kW SV150DBU 2U 200V 18 5 22 kW SV220DBU 2 U 200V 30 37 kW SV370DBU 2 U 200V 45 55 kW SV550DBU 2 U Gouna UL Type 400V 11 15 kW SV150DBU 4 U ie See 4 Dimensions 400V 18 5 22 kW SV220DBU 4 U 400V 30 37 kW SV370DBU 4 U 400V 45 55 kW SV550DBU 4 U 400V 75 kW SV750DBU 4 U 2 Terminal configuration cot wm Cee eT ow Te Tw Te re cops Ce Tw Ts or oe ee B E Connect it to Inverter terminal N Connect it to Inverter terminal P Common for Terminal OH Overheat Trip Output Terminal Open Collector output 20mA 27V DC 175 Chapter 7 Options 3 DB Resistor Unit wiring for 15 100 HP Inverter DB Resistor DB Unit Max distance between N amp N 5m Wires should be Twisted Max distance between P amp P2 5m Short Analog freq output 2 FWD Run Stop Max Current thru REV Run Stop RX PC 5mA Emergency stop Fault reset Jog 176 4 Dimensions e Group 1 4 M5S Mounting de a E Dynamic Braking Unit WIRING B2 UNIT 0G Be DYNAMIC B1 BRAKING
36. 39 Set it to 0 V F 2 Drive Mode DRV 3 Set it to Fx Rx 1 3 Frequency Mode DRV 4 Set V1 Analog input value in frequency mode 4 ie us lil DRV 0 Set freq command 50 Hz via V1 potentiometer 5 Accel Decel time DRV 2 Set Accel time to 15 Sec in DRV 2 DRV 3 Set Decel time to 25 Sec in DRV 3 Motor starts to rotate in Forward direction at 50Hz with Accel time 15 sec when FX terminal is turned ON 8 lis Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25 sec when FX terminal is turned OFF When RX terminal is turned ON motor starts to rotate in Reverse 7 Terminal RX direction at 50 Hz with Accel time 15 Hz When it is OFF motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25 Sec 46 Chapter 3 Function Settings Operation VIF PG Control Operation Run Stop via Keypad Operation condition Control mode V F PG control Frequency command 50 Hz Digital input via Keypad Accel time 15 sec Decel time 25 sec Drive mode Run Stop via Keypad Wiring block diagram when an Open Collector type encoder is used Wiring o e 3P 0 0 R BI ER U AC 0 0 S V 30 Input o o T Ww F e pense ny C sub B gt AOC Boc oO At A BO B O FBA FBB GND O GND OP VO 5V gt VR VCC O 1 Power vi VCC O _ __ Supply 5G 12V 15V DC Step Parameter setting Code Description 1 Control Mod
37. 6000 sec 1 1 sec 0 1 to 6000 sec 1 1 sec 135 Reverse e Forward Yes Forward i 0 01 0 to FU1 20 126 26 Code 1 0 46 through I O 49 are used in Option Board like RS485 Device Net and F net etc 27 The Seq of code 1 0 53 through 1 0 60 varies according to the sequence number selected in 1 0 51 The parameter code may be extended to 1 O 84 depending the number of steps set in l O 52 because the steps can be set up to 8 67 Chapter 5 Parameter List Keypad Displa Factory Adi Code Description uP p y 2 2 Eat During Page 7 Segment 7 Segment Run 110 90 Step Frequency 13 Step freq 13 50 00 Hz 1 0 91 Step Frequency 14 Step freq 14 40 00 Hz 10 92 Step Frequency 15 Step freq 15 30 00 Hz oO AN DOO FP WwW NY O Aa A aA 0 QU UU WW 4 A A YY AY NN N NY NN NNN YN gt a a 2 2 2 2 gt gt N gt O O DAN DO A O Na ODO DAN Da gt ON a O AO DAN Da FP 0 0 noo Speed L Speed M Speed H E De brake 2nd Func Exchange Reserved i Down i Ext Trip A E Ext Trip B iTerm Clear Open loop Main drive Analog hold XCEL stop ees i P Gain2 jgag el RST define SEQL Reset Yes 120 Terminal RST Define i SEQH Manual Go step Hold step Trv Off Lo Interlock1 Interlock2 Interlock3 Interlock4 Speed X Reset JOG Ana Change Pre excite Spd Trq ASRPIPL 68 Chapter 5 Parameter List Keypad Displa
38. 7 8 BR1200W015J SV 075185 2 3 220 345 93 140 330 7 8 BR2400W010J SV 110185 2 3 220 445 93 140 430 7 8 BR2400W008J SV 150185 2 3 220 445 93 140 430 7 8 BR3600W005J SV 185185 2 3 220 445 165 140 430 7 8 BR3600W005J SV 220185 2 3 220 445 165 140 430 7 8 BRO400W600J SV 0081S5 4 1 64 412 40 400 6 3 BRO400W300J SV 0151S5 4 1 64 412 40 400 6 3 BRO400W200J SV 0221S5 4 1 64 412 40 400 6 3 BR0600W130J SV 0371S5 4 2 128 390 43 64 370 5 BR1000W085J SV 055185 4 3 220 345 93 140 330 7 8 BR1200W060J SV 075185 4 3 220 345 93 140 330 7 8 BR2000W040J SV 110185 4 3 220 445 93 140 430 7 8 BR2400W030J SV 150185 4 3 220 445 93 140 430 7 8 BR3600W020J SV 185185 4 3 220 445 165 140 430 7 8 BR3600W020J SV 220185 4 3 220 445 165 140 430 7 8 Type 1 Max 400 Watt THERMAL SENSE 173 Chapter 7 Options Type 2 Max 600 Watt O B1_P7 CM Bel O AMIA MIA O Type 3 174 Chapter 7 Options 7 7 DB Dynamic Brake Unit 1 DBU models UL Inverter Applicable motor rating DB Unit Dimension 200V 11 15 kW SV150DBU 2 Group 1 200V 18 5 22 kW SV220DBU 2 See 4 Dimensions 200V
39. Accel Decel 0 6 000 sec Up to 4 Types can be Set and Selected for Each Setting Use Multi Function Time Terminal Accel Decel Pattern Linear U Curve S Curve Emergency Stop Interrupts the Output of Inverter 2 Jog Jog Operation Auto Operation Operates from Internal Sequence by Setting Multi Function Terminal 5 Way 8 Step 3 Fault Reset Trip Status is Removed when Protection Function is Active Operating Status Frequency Detection Level Overload Alarm Stalling Over Voltage Under Voltage Inverter ES Overheating Running Stop Constant Speed Inverter By Pass Speed Searching Auto B Operation Step Auto Operation Sequence 2 Fault Output Contact Output 30A 30C 30B AC250V 1A DC30V 1A 6 Indicator Choose 1 from Output Frequency Output Current Output Voltage DC Voltage Output Torque Output Voltage 0 10V Operation Function DC Braking Frequency Limit Frequency Jump Second Function Slip Compensation Reverse Rotation Prevention Auto Restart Inverter By Pass Auto Tuning PID Control Inverter Trip Over Voltage Under Voltage Over Current Fuse Open Ground Fault Inverter Overheating Motor Overheating Output Phase Open Overload Protection External Fault 1 2 E Communication Error Loss of Speed Command Hardware Fault Option Fault Overspeed E M C Fail etc Inverter Alarm Stall Prevention Overload Alarm Temperature Sensor Fault Momentary Power Loss Auto Restart function activated when FU2 21 Restart after
40. CMt seq ON PX Example 1 of Auto A operation 1S 2T 2S 3T 3S Output Frequency Sequence 1 Sequence 2 Sequence 3 SEQH 2F SEQ2 2F SEQ1 1F gt Time SEQ3 2F SEQ3 1F el SEQ L gt Time P2 CM l ON SEQ M gt Time Example 2 of Auto A operation Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O AUTO B This mode can be also used to program up to 8 different 1 0 85 I O 97 Step frequecy 8 9 10 11 12 13 steps as Auto A However to switch from one step to 14 15 Multi function input terminal RST BX another an external contact closure set to Go step is JOG FX RX Define required See the description pages of I O 21 39 for more details Output Frequency Sequence 1 Sequence3 Sequence 2 sar i SEQ2 2F SEQ1 1F SEQ3 2F SEQ3 1F P1 CM y SEQ L ON 7 l oe A P2 CM SEQ M ON i gt Time P3 CMf Go step ION ION ION ION ION gt Time SS Minimum 100msec Example of Auto B operation Note When a new sequence is selected during a sequence operating the new sequence starts after the current sequence is finished 1 0 53 1 0 84 Frequency Transient Time Steady Speed Time Motor Direction setting of each Step and Sequence These parameter codes set the frequen
41. Confirm that the DRV 04 is set at V1 DRV gt Freq mode D vs A 04 v1 i E The PROG ENT LED is turned ON 8 Press SHIFT ESC key Set the frequency by rotating the BEETA 0 0 A a amp 9 LCD Press FWD or REV key a The RUN LED starts blinking 7 Seg Press RUN key The FWD or REV LED starts blinking To change the motor running direction change DRV 13 to 1 54 4 3 2 1 Connect wiring as shown below Pa Pa P3 FX RX NC WR Wi os eu Jem Bx rsr 1 ems 2 Apply AC power 3 Confirm that the DRV 03 is set at Fx Rx 1 4 Confirm that the DRV 04 is set at Keypad 1 5 Press SHIFT ESC key 6 LCD Press PROG key 7 Seg Press PROG ENT key 7 LCD Set the frequency using SHIFT ESC and A key 7 Seg Set the frequency by rotating the encoder knob 8 LCD Press ENT key to save the data 7 Seg Press PROG ENT key to save the data 9 Close the FX or RX contact to run the motor 10 Open the FX or RX contact to stop the motor Chapter 4 Quick start procedures Frequency set by Keypad and Run Stop by External Source LCD Display DRVPT K 0 0 A 00 STP 0 00Hz DRV Drive mode 03 Fx Rx 1 DRV gt Freq mode 04 Keypad 1 DRVPT K 00 STP 0 0 A 0 00Hz DRV Cmd freq 00 0 00Hz DRV Cmd freq 00 60 00Hz DRVPT V 0 0 A 00 STP 60 00Hz The FWD or REV LED starts blinking The FWD or REV LED starts blinking 55 7 Segment Displ
42. Factory Adi Code Description JE p y y 7 y Dai During Page 7 Segment 7 Segment Run Multi Function Input e 110 94 f BX define i BX Yes 120 Terminal BX Define E Multi Function Input 1 0 95 JOG define JOG Yes 120 Terminal JOG Define i Same as Above Multi Function Input 1 0 96 nye FX define FX Yes 120 Terminal FX Define Multi Function Input i 1 0 97 RX define RX Yes 120 Terminal RX Define i 10 99 Return Code Not Displayed Not available la fe 69 Chapter 5 Parameter List 5 5 External Group EXT EXT group appears only when the corresponding Sub Board is installed Keypad Displa Factory Ad Code Description i i Sit During Page 7 Segment 7 Segment Run EXT 00 Jump to Desired Code to Desired Code Jump code Not displayed 0 to 99 Not available EXT 01 Sub Board Type Display i Oo AON Da A UNa Ojo Nona FW YY O EA o EXT 02 Multi Function Input P4 define Speed L XCELL Yes 136 Terminal P4 Define i Speed M i Speed H Dc brake 2nd Func Exchange Reserved Down Ext Trip A Ext Trip B iTerm Clear Open loop Main drive Analog hold XCEL stop P Gain2 SEQL SEQM SEQH Manual Go step Hold step Trv Off Lo Interlock1 Interlock2 Interlock3 l Interlock4 l 70 Chapter 5 Parameter List Code Description ve i E Hea Dur
43. For Open collector type GND Ground Terminal Ground for Power supply and encoder signal 7 2 4 Parameters of Sub B Board Code Parameter Description Code Parameter Description EXT 01 Sub Board Type Display EXT 21 Pulse Input Signal Adjustment EXT 14 Usage for Pulse Input Signal EXT 22 P Gain EXT 15 Pulse Input Signal Selection EXT 23 I Gain EXT 16 Encoder Pulse Number EXT 24 Slip Frequency EXT 17 Filtering Time Constant EXT 25 P Gain for Sensored Vector_SPD EXT 18 EXT 26 _ l Gain for Sensored Vector_SPD EXT 19 Pulse Input Signal Adjustment EXT 27 Forward Torque Limit EXT 20 EXT 28 Reverse Torque Limit 158 Chapter 7 Options 1 Sub B board with Line Drive type encoder FWD Run Stop Maximum current thru PC 5mA Encoder signal Fault reset LD input Multi function PA REV Run Stop Emergency stop __input 1 1 0 12 14 Multi function P2 Factory setting Encoger _ Input 2 Multi speed input a Multi function P3 _ Speed L M H outpu input 3 Encoder Common Terminal signal ground 5 V power output to Encoder Potentiometer 1 kohm 1 2W vr Power supply for speed signal 12V 10mA V1 Speed signal input 0 10V 1 kohm I Speed signal input 4 20mA 2500hm 5G Common for VR V1 1 Note 1 Main circuit Control circuit 2 External speed signal V1 V1 l Ref
44. High Limit Frequency for PID Control Low Limit Frequency for PID Control FU2 57 PID Output Inversion PID Out Dir PID F B PID P gain PID time PID D time FU2 52 _Fu2 53 _FU2 54 PID limit H PID limit L PID Out Inv Fu2 s8 PID Output Scale PID Out Scale FU2 59 PID P2 Gain PID P2 gain Fu2 60 P Gain Scale P gain Scale Accel Decel Change FU2 69 Acc Dec ch F Frequency Reference Frequency for FU2 70 Accel and Decel FU2 FU2 U2 74 Acc Dec freq Time scale U2 71 Accel Decel Time Scale FU2 72 Power On Display PowerOn disp User disp U2 73 User Display Selection E Gain for Motor Speed Display RPM factor 23 Code FU2 48 through FU2 62 appears only when FU2 47 is set to Yes Aux Ref Mode Factory E 7 Segment Default 0 to depend on FU2 30 ms Adj During Run No 0 N No 110 O Yes 1 0 to 999 9 0 i B Target freq 0 to 32 0 sec 10 0 sec 0 to 1000 msec 0 0 msec 0 to 300 00 Hz 60 00 Hz 0 to 300 00 Hz 0 00 Hz No e 0 i No Yes i 1 0 1 to 999 9 100 0 to 999 9 100 0 to 100 100 0 to FU1 20 Target freq v2 2 0 to 999 9 0 00 Hz Max freq Delta freq 0 01 sec 0 1 sec 1 sec O No No e e Yes Yes N No z z lt lt z o o 2 12 o O No 110 o 114 Empa Voltage e 0 Watt 4 Voltage
45. Hz 0 Max freq 1 0 09 20 mA 0 20 mA 1 0 10 60 Hz 0 Max freq 80 Code Keypad display Parameter Name 10 06 I filter Filter time constant for signal Input 1 0 07 curr x1 Input Minimum Current E Frequency Corresponding to ee ledy Input Minimum Current 1 0 09 curr x2 Input Maximum Current Frequency Corresponding to eb reg ye Input Maximum Current Important Increase 1 0 06 Filter time constant for signal Input if the signal is affected by noise causing unstable operation Increasing this value makes response time slower Set freq 10 10 y 10 08 Terminal 0 20 mA 1 0 07 1 0 09 Minimum Maximum current current Related Functions DRV 04 Frequency or Torque Mode DRV 16 Speed Unit Selection FU1 20 Maximum Frequency FU2 39 Control Mode Selection 1 0 1 10 Analog Frequency Command Torque DRV 01 Acceleration Time DRV Acc 01 time 20 0 sec 01 20 0 Factory Default 20 0 sec 20 0 Chapter 6 Parameter Description DRV LCD Pane XCEL XCEL XCEL Factory Code Description f DRV 02 Deceleration Time display A a ETER rz pi Acc time Acc time 0 0 0 0 10 sec ets 1me 02 30 0 sec 02 30 0 no Dec time Dec time 0 0 0 0 20 sec Factory Default 3070 set 30 0 1 0 25 ACC 1 Acc time 1 0 0 1 20 s
46. Loss Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O 1 0 50 Auto Sequence Operation 1 0 51 Sequence Number Selection Seq 1 0 52 The Number of Steps of Sequence 1 0P Auto mode 50 None Factory Default None 0 There are two modes of Auto A and Auto B in Auto mode Auto operation is activated by the multi function input terminals set to SEQ L SEQ M SEQ H and Go step in 1 0 12 1 0 14 1 0 Seq select Ed r 31 1 Factory Default 1 1 This code selects the sequence to set frequency transient time steady speed time and motor direction the steps I O Step number 52 2 32 2 Factory Default 2 2 This code sets the number of steps to use for the sequence number selected in 1 0 51 Auto A This mode will allow the inverter to operate automatically followed by its pre programmed sequence According to this sequence eight different steps of Frequency Transient Time Steady Speed time and Motor Direction can be initiated with only a single multi function input contact closure I O 12 1 0 14 The sequence and steps are set in 1 0 51 1 0 84 134 Step Parameter Speed H Speed M Speed L Frequency Code P3 P2 P1 Sequence 1 0 0 1 Sequence 2 0 1 0 E 3 ee 1 0 0 1 0 84 Sequence 4 0 1 1 Sequence 5 1 0 1 0 OFF 1 ON Output Frequency A 2D SOQ QF g 1D Seqt 1F Forward gt Time Seq1 3F AT P1
47. Loss hes 1 0 48 Operating Method at Signal Loss Stall Level 1 0 49 Waiting Time for Time Out Run Output F Sees AXA AXC is CLOSED when the inverter is running Stop AXA AXC is CLOSED when the inverter is stopped gt Time sonal E lt a INV line COMM line gt Time This function is used in conjunction with Exchange AXA AXC configured as Stall function of multi function input for commercial line exchange To use both signal of INV line and COMM Related Functions FU1 59 Stall Prevention Mode line the optional Sub A or Sub C board must be FU1 60 Stall Prevention Level installed OV AXA AXC is CLOSED when the DC link voltage is above g Output Frequency vo Speed Search the Over voltage level pe DC Link Voltage ij j OV Level 380V DC or 760V DC gt Time ji gt Time FX CM ON gt Time A E P A AXA AXC x ON gt Time Exchange CM ON Time AXA AXC configured as OV AXA AXC gt COMM line o gt Time LV QI EXTG oq EX ON AXA AXC is CLOSED when the DC link voltage is below INV ine gt Time the Low voltage level y Z DC Link Voltage 3 s ae 1 LV Level 200V DC or 400V DC ae ae pide t1 t2 50msec interlock time AXA AXC configured as COMM line and Q1 as INV line Related Functions 1 0 12 1 0 14 Multi function inp
48. M bat af bal The PROG ENT LED is turned ON m x raf uf bf E ni mim O bud ror MA NA A Vat Dal Dal Daf Dal Daf The PROG ENT LED is turned ON The PROG ENT LED is turned ON The RUN LED starts blinking To change the motor running direction change DRV 13 to 1 The STOP RESET LED starts blinking Chapter 4 Quick start procedures 4 2 Operation using Control Terminals 1 Install a potentiometer on terminals V1 VR 5G and connect wiring as LCD Display 7 Segment Display shown below 1 kQ 1 2 W Joc cm CM BX RsT FM 2 Apply AC power DRV gt T K 0 0 A Z ra r 00 STP 0 00Hz bt bal but The DRV LED is ON 3 Confirm that the DRV 03 is set at FyIRXe1 DRV gt Drive mode m 03 Fx Rx 1 ll 4 LCD Press A key to move DRV 04 7 Seg Rotate encoder knob until 04 DRV gt Freq mode mo og x is displayed 04 Keypad 1 bt bf 5 LCD Press PROG key DRV gt Freq mode 7 Seg Press PROG ENT key 04 Keypad 1 M Y M The PROG ENT LED is turned ON 6 LCD Press A key and set at V1 DRVP Freq mode 7 Seg Rotate encoder knob and set 04 v1 XET at 2 mt A bn The PROG ENT LED is turned ON 7 LCD Press ENT key DRVP Freq mode 7 Seg Press PROG ENT key 04 vi t gt m m The PROG ENT LED is turned OFF 8 Press SHIFT ESC key DRVPT V 0 0 A 00 STP 0 00Hz E yn Tio rf M bal 9 Set the frequency by rotating the DRVPT V 0 0 A potentiometer 00 STP 60 00Hz Z IZ a a Dat Dut but bu
49. Minimum 0 sec settable Max Freq 1 0 1 sec Maximum 600 sec settable Factory setting 2 iset Minimum 0 sec settable Maximum 6000 sec settable Up to 6000 sec setting is available via LE 200 keypad E i l gt Time Acc time Dec time Related Functions FU1 20 Max freq DRV 03 Drive Mode Run Stop Method FU2 70 Reference freq for Accel Decel FU2 71 Accel Decel time scale 1 0 12 to 1 O 14 Multi function input PODE OG 03 1 terminal P1 P2 P3 03 Keypad 1 0 25 to 1 0 38 Acc Dec time for step frequency Factory Default Fx Rx 1 1 FU2 70 Selects the frequency to be targeted for acceleration and deceleration Max Freq Delta Freq Select the source of run stop command FU2 71 Selects the time scale 0 01 0 2 1 1 0 12 to 1 0 14 Sets the terminal function of P1 P2 P3 Setting Range Description terminal inputs LCD 7 Seg 1 0 25 to 1 0 38 Presets the Accel Decel time activated via Keypad 0 _ Run Stop is controlled by Keypad multifunction inputs P1 P2 P3 Fx Rx 1 1 Control Terminals FX RX and 5G control Run Stop Method 1 Control Terminals FX RX and 5G Note 1 0 12 to I O 14 Sets the terminal function of P1 Z PARRE 4 control Run Stop Method 2 P2 P3 terminal inputs 81 Chapter 6 Parameter Description DRV Output Frequency DRV 04 Frequency or
50. Only Function 1 group is initialized Factory Default 1 FU2 4 Only Function 2 group is initialized 3 y f 1 0 5 Only Input Output group is initialized This code is used to exit a group when using a 7 EXT 6 Only External group is initialized segment keypad After pressing PROG ENT key set the COM z Only Communication group is value to 1 and press the PROG ENT key again to exit initialized APP 8 Only Application group is initialized Related Functions FU1 99 Return Code 1 0 99 Return Code EXT 99 Return Code Note FU1 30 FU1 37 Motor Parameters must be set COM 99 Return Code first after initializing parameters 117 Chapter 5 Parameter Description I O 6 4 Input Output Group 1 0 1 O 00 Jump to Desired Code 1 0 Jump code 00 1 Factory Default 1 Jumping directly to any parameter code can be accomplished by entering the desired code number This code is available only with LCD keypad 1 0 01 1 0 05 Analog Voltage Input V1 Signal Adjustment This is used to adjust the analog voltage input signal when the frequency is referenced by the control terminal V1 This function is applied when DRV 04 is set to V1 or V1 I Reference frequency versus Analog voltage input curve can be made by four parameters of l 0 02 10 04 1 0 V1 filter 01 10 ms 01 10 Factory Default 10 ms 10 This is the filtering time
51. Output Adjustment ExT 42 AM2 Analog Meter 2 OutputSelecion To y AM2 Output Adjustment 2 2 154 7 1 Sub A board 7 1 1 Board configuration 3P 230 460 VO 50 60 HzO Forward Run Stop Maximum Re current thru PC 5mA Reverse Run Stop Emergency stop Fault reset Jog Multi function input 1 1 0 12 14 P2 Factory setting Multi speed input Speed L M H Multi function input 2 Multi function input 3 Common Terminal Power supply for O VR Potentiometer speed signal 1 k ohm 1 2W 12V 10mA O y4 Speed signal input 0 10V 1 kohm Speed signal input 4 20mA 250 ohm Common for VR V1 Speed signal input Note 1 Main circuit O Control circuit 2 Output voltage is adjustable up to 12V 3 Three types of External speed signal input available Chapter 7 Options Output freq E Analog Meter 0 10V 1mA Power supply for VR V2 12V 10mA Voltage input y2 0 10V 1kohm Sub A Board Potentiometer 1 kohm 1 2W Output freq 2 Common LM Analog Meter terminal for Multi function CM 0 10V 1mA input amp LM XCEL L Multi function P5 input XCEL M XCEL H FDT 1 FDT 2 Multi function output FDT 3 Common terminal for multi function output Q1 Q2 Q3 Fault output relay Less than AC 250V 1A Less than DC 30V 1A Multi fun
52. Position 194 TECHNICAL STANDARDS APPLIED The standards applied in order to comply with the essential requirements of the Directives 73 23 CEE Electrical material intended to be used with certain limits of voltage and 89 336 CEE Electromagnetic Compatibility are the following ones e EN 50178 1997 e EN 61800 3 A11 2000 e EN 55011 A2 2002 e EN 61000 4 2 A2 2001 e EN 61000 4 3 A2 2001 e EN 61000 4 4 A2 2001 e EN 61000 4 5 A1 2000 e EN 61000 4 6 A1 2001 e CEI TR 61000 2 1 1990 e EN 61000 2 2 2002 lt 22Kw EN 61000 2 4 1997 gt 22Kw EN 60146 1 1 A1 1997 gt 22Kw Electronic equipment for use in power installations Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific methods Industrial scientific and medical ISM radio frequency equipment Radio disturbances characteristics Limits and methods of measurement Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 Testing and measurement techniques Section 2 Electrostatic discharge immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 Testing and measurement techniques Section 3 Radiated radiofrequency electromagnetic field immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 Testing and measurement techniques Section 4 Electrical fast transients burst immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 Testing and measurem
53. Prev Acc pattern Dec pattern Stop mode DcBr freq DcBIk time DcBr value DcBr time DcSt value DcSt time PreExTime Hold Time Flux Force Max freq Base freq Start freq Freq limit F limit Lo F limit Hi Adj Default eae foetal a ee 1 to 99 None E Not available Forward Prev None Reverse Prev Linear S curve U curve Linear Minimum Optimum Linear S curve U curve Linear Minimum Optimum Decel DC brake Free run Pot ooo ows on wowo oo monwa fo n 39 O a S 5 1 0 sec on S 3s o o on D 2 jj at wm oO O 1000 e 100 0 60 00 60 00 91 0 50 0 50 Hz ES 60 00 H T r N o o T 0 to FU1 25 FU1 24 to EUs 20 0 0 T A Torque boost Manual 3 o o o h h _ Manual Auto Torque 92 FU1 26 Boost Selection 14 Code FU1 08 through FU1 11 appears only when FU1 07 is set to DC Brake 15 Code FU1 24 through FU1 25 appears only when FU1 23 is set to Yes 58 Chapter 5 Parameter List Keypad Displa Factory Adi Code Description ye R y ing ng D UE real g Page 7 Segment 7 Segment Torque Boost in Forward Fwd boost 0 to 15 2 0 Direction Torque Boost in Reverse Rev boost 0 to 15 m 2 0 Direction Linear FU1 29 Volts Hz Pattern V F pattern Square Linear 93 User V F i LFu1 30 User V F Frequency 1 User freq 1 H FUut 31 UserViF Votaget User volt 1 1 FU1 32_ User
54. Speed search during a Fault Reset Tine 0 0 1 0 restarting FU2 21 and Auto restarting FU2 26 Speed Search Operation Speed search during Instant Power 0 1 0 0 Failure restarting 1 0 0 0 Speed search during Power ON Related Functions FU2 20 Power ON Start starting FU2 20 FU2 21 Restart after Fault Reset FU2 26 FU2 27 Auto Restart FU2 30 FU2 37 Motor Parameters When FU2 22 is set to 1111 Speed Search works for all conditions FU2 22 Speed Search Selection selects the speed search function FU2 26 Number of Auto Restart Attempt FU2 27 Delay Time Before Auto Restart FU2 23 Current Limit Level is the current that the inverter limits its current rise during speed searching The set value is the percentage of FU2 33 Rated Motor Current FU2 Retry number 26 0 a 0 Factory Default 0 FU2 24 P Gain is the proportional gain used for speed search Set this value according to load inertia set in FU2 37 FU2 Retry delay 27 1 0 sec 21 10 Factory Default 1 0 sec 10 FU2 25 I Gain is the Integral gain used for speed search Set this value according to load inertia set in FU2 37 This function is used to allow the inverter to reset itself for a selected number of times after a fault has occurred The inverter can restart itself automatically when a fault occurs To use the speed search function during auto restarting set FU2 22 to xx1x See FU2 2
55. The S5 series inverter provides many options for various applications See the following option table and select the proper options according to your application Option Name Description O Extended I O Module O Three Multi Function Inputs P4 P5 P6 o O Three Multi Function Outputs Q1 Q2 Q3 O Auxiliary Analog Frequency Reference V2 O LM Load Meter Output 0 10V Sub B Board O Encoder Pulse Input Speed Feedback AOC BOC A A B B O Encoder Pulse Output FBA FBB S ld oO Vector control PG operation and reference freq via pulse input 3 Extended I O Module 5 Sub Boards Sub C Board O Three Bune FuPcion Inputs P4 P5 P6 5 Extended I O O One UI rancio Outputs Q1 O Isolated Auxiliary Analog Frequency Reference V2 o Two Isolated Analog Meter Output AM1 AM2 __ O Connection with Fnet Communication Module for GLOFA PLC PLC Communication F Net O Inverter Connection Max 64 o Baud Rate 1M bps O RS 485 Communication RS 485 O Inverter Connection Max 32 O Baud Rate Max 19200 bps T LCD o 32 Character Display Keypad O Download and Upload from the Keypad 7 Segment O Six Digit 7 Sengment Display Remote g Cable Remote Cable 1 2m 3m 5m long keypad cables for separate keypad installation Dynamic DB Resistor O Enables Inverter to decelerate rapidly Braking DB Unit o DB units are provided as an option for 40 100 HP inverters Note Refer to
56. Torque EXT 35 LM Output Adjustment LM adjust 10 to 200 pa 4 100 Y Frequency E Current AM1 Analog Meter 1 AM1 mode Voltage Frequency Yes Output Selection DC link Vtg Torque i EXT 41 AM1 Output Adjustment AM1 adjust 10 to 200 3 4 100 Yes 141 Frequency Current AM2 Analog Meter 2 AM2 mode Voltage DC link Vtg Yes Output Selection DC link Vtg Torque i EXT 43 AM2 Output Adjustment AM2 adjust 10 to 200 4 100 EXT 50 Speed Limit Level Speed Limit 0 to 100 100 EXT 51 Speed Limit Bias Speed Bias 0 to 200 100 EXT 52 Speed Limit Gain Speed Gain 1 to 10 thee i Reverse i EXT 53 Speed Limit Direction Speed Dir Fonas Forward Zero Speed Detection EXT 54 ZSD Level 0 to 120 Hz 2 Hz Level Zero Speed Detection EXT 55 A ZSD Band 0 to 5 Hz 1 Hz Bandwidth EXT 56 Torque Detection Level TD Level 0 to 150 100 Torque Detection EXT 57 TD Band 0 to 10 5 Bandwidth EXT 99 Return Code Not displayed Not available 73 Chapter 5 Parameter List 5 6 Communication Group COM COM group appears only when the corresponding Option Boards are installed Please refer to the option manual for detail Keypad Display Setting Range 7 Segment COM 00 Jump to Desired Code to Desired Code COM 01 Option Board Type COM Option Mode COM 03 Option Version Binary Option Input COM 04 bee j Selection mou Torque Limit al Control Mod
57. V F Frequency2 User freq 2 Hz FU1 33 User V F Voltage2 User volt 2 0 94 FUt 34 User V F Frequency 3 User freq 3 User volt 3 5 FU1 36 User V F Frequency4 User freq 4 0 01 60 00 Hz No User volt 4 100 4 Output Voltage FU1 38 Volt control 40 to 110 0 1 100 0 94 Adjustment FU1 39 Energy Save Level Energy save 0 to 30 el Electronic Thermal FU1 50 ETH select Selection i Electronic Thermal Level i FU1 5117 ETH 1 min FU1 52 to 200 180 for 1 Minute ry gt i mv a alo S f LN wo o o o Zz a a Sl S Ea es engl EE D o 3s 120 Electronic Thermal Level ETH cont 50 to FU1 51 Maximum 150 for Continuous Electronic Thermal Self cool Characteristic Selection Motor type Self cool Motor Type Forced cool FU1 54 Overload Warning Level OL level 30 to 150 A 1 150 Overload Warning Hold FU1 55 OL time 0 to 30 sec 0 1 10 0 sec Yes FU1 56 Overload Trip Selection OLT select ME ql Yes rra 57 Overload Trip Level OLT level 30 to 200 Z 1 180 Yes Fu1 58 58 Overload Trip Delay Time OLT time 0 to 60 sec Stall Prevention Mode 000 to 111 Stall prev lara Bit Set w 97 Fut 60 Stall Prevention Level Stall level 30 to 250 1 180 5 on OTe Retum Code Not displayed __ Not available Eu og o n D LO o o 16 Code FU1 30 through FU1 37 appears only when FU1 29 is set to User V F 17
58. activated in FU2 94 Parameter Lock 26 Chapter 2 Operation 2 2 3 Parameter Navigation LCD Keypad The parameter group moves directly to DRV group by pressing SHIFT ESC key in any parameter code FU2 Group I O Group U2 Jump code lO Jump code 00 1 1 0 V1 filter 01 10 ms 1 0 V1 volt x1 02 0 00 V 1 0 V1 freq y1 03 0 00 Hz DRV gt T K 0 0A FU1 gt Jump code woe 00 STP 0 00Hz 00 1 PP APT DRV gt Acc time FU1 gt Run prohibit 01 10 0 sec 03 None a DRV Dec time 02 20 0 sec F 0 0 30 aP e FU2 Last trip 1 0d FU1 Acc pattern 05 Linear DRV Drive mode 03 Fx Rx 1 DRV Freq mode 04 KevPad 1 04 10 00 V DRV Step freq 1 FU1 gt DcSt value FU2 Last trip 5 1 0 V1 freq y2 05 10 00 Hz 08 50 05 05 60 00 Hz FU1 gt Dec pattern 06 Linear 1 0 V1 volt x2 DO FDA ef OO Ff OO a DRV gt Fault FU1 gt Stall Level FU2 Para lock 1 0 Way1 2D 12 60 150 94 0 60 Forward 27 Chapter 2 Operation 2 3 7 Segment Keypad lex 7 segment display N Ce O lt A O GD DRV FU1 FUZ 1 0 EXT Parameter Group Display LEDs A SHIFT This button is Encoder knob used to move cursor across display in programming mode ESC This button is used to move the program code to DRV 00 from any program code Used to move you through parameter groups and parameter code Also used to
59. blk time Motor select i Not displayed Speed Search 18 Code FU2 11 through FU2 16 appears only when FU2 10 is set to Yes 60 1to99 Not available By pressing PROG and A key the frequency current and operational status at the time of fault can be seen 1 No Yes 0 to 10 sec Yes 0 01 0 to 100 0 to 100 00 to 11 Bit Set No E Yes Yes 0000 to 1111 Bit Set 80 to 200 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 10 0 to 60 sec O 75KW 1 1 1 1 1 1 Factory Default el No 10 00 15 00 20 00 25 00 30 00 35 00 T TI N T r N 40 40 No No 0000 150 1 o o I ll EN TIT 2 N JN IND LN JN TNL iz 00 200 19 E o ro D O Adj During Page Run Yes o 100 Yes 02 3 O O O Yes Yes N N Y Y Y N Y Y Y e e e e e e e e 104 Chapter 5 Parameter List KeypadDDisplay Factory Adi Code Description Je P y y mg Cert During Page 7 Segment 7 Segment Run FU2 31 Number of Motor Poles Pole number 2to 12 1 Oo AN DO F amp F WP gt Zoo gt O N gt O o o E e E e E No RMS FU2 35 Motor Rated Voltage Motor Volt 180 460 V Motor Efficiency Efficiency 70 to 100 1 No FU2 37 Load Inertia Inertia rate FU2 38 Carrier Frequency Carrier freq 1 to 15 ktiz 5 kHz Yes Pa comp Sensorless _S FU2 39 Control Mode Selection Con
60. broken half of x1 Signal Loss l below x1 0 12 Multi Function Input P1 define Speed L Terminal P1 Define Speed M Speed H XCEL L XCEL M XCEL H Dc brake 2nd Func Exchange Reserved Up Down 3 Wire Ext Trip A Ext Trip B iTerm Clear Open loop i Main drive 64 o AN Oa A OO Na OJN gt O B k o Chapter 5 Parameter List F ea Code Description E i Default 7 Segment 7 Segment Analog hold 18 XCEL stop 19 P Gain2 20 SEQL 21 SEQ M 22 SEQ H 23 Manual 24 Go step 25 Hold step 26 Trv Off Lo 27 Trv Off Hi 28 Interlock 29 Interlock2 30 Interlock3 31 i Interlock4 32 Speed X 33 Reset 34 BX 35 JOG 36 E FX 37 Ana Change 39 Pre excite 40 Spd Tra 41 ASRPIPL 42 Multi function Input 110 13 EA P2 define Terminal P2 Define i f f Same as Above Multi function Input 14 f P3 define Terminal P3 Define 0 15 Terminal Input Status In status 000000000 to 111111111 0 16 Terminal Output Status Out status 0000 to 1111 Filtering Time Constant 1 0 17 for Multi Function Input Ti Filt Num e 2 to 50 15 Terminals i 1 10 20 Jog Frequency Setting 10 00 Hz 110 21 Step Frequency 4 Step freq 4 40 00 Hz 0 22 Step Frequency 5 Step freq 5 e 0 to FU1 20 50 00 Hz 1 0 23 _ Step Frequency 6 Step freq 6 10 24 Step Frequency 7 Step freq 7 30 00 Hz Yes Acceleration Time 1 i 110 25 Acc time 1 i 0 to 6000 sec 0 1
61. can improve the performance during regeneration for systems with frequent acceleration and deceleration operations O Utilize the auto tuning feature when the motor reaches normal temperature average temperature where the motor normally operates O Output torque may be reduced when an output filter option is used between the inverter and the motor O If the speed is unstable when the FU2 38 Carrier Frequency Selection is set to a value more than 10kHz change the setting to 5 10kHz O Over current fault can occur if the FU2 41 Stator Resistance Rs is set to a value more than twice the auto tuned value CL Max setting range is 300 Hz Detail Tuning Method for Sensorless Vector Control O Adjust the FU2 34 No Load Motor Current RMS value larger or smaller by 5 units if the current is larger or smaller than that of V F control with small load O Adjust the FU2 32 Rated Motor Slip value larger or smaller by 5 units if the speed is faster or slower than that of V F control with small load e Sensorless_T Sensorless Vector Torque Operation All settings are the same as Sensorless_S except using torque reference for torque control e Vector_TRQ Vector control torque Operation All settings are the same as Vector_SPD except using torque reference for torque control Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 FU2 40 44 Auto tuning FU2P Auto tuning 40 NO 40 0 Factory Default NO 0
62. certain frequency This is useful in textile machine application Note If the multi function input terminal 1 0 12 1 0 14 is set to XCEL L XCEL M or XCEL H The Multi Accel Decel Time 1 0 25 1 0 38 has the priority Accel Decel Change Frequency y Max Frequency Output Frequency DRV 02 DecTime DRV 01 AccTime 1 0 25 Acc Time1 Accel Decel Change Operation 1 0 26 Dec Time1 ae E Seg Description The Accel Decel time is the time that Max freq 0 takes to reach the maximum frequency from 0 Hz The Accel Decel time is the time that takes to reach a target frequency from a frequency currently operating frequency Delta freq 1 DRV 01 DRV 02 Accel Decel Time FU2 71 Accel Decel Time Scale Related Functions 1 0 25 1 0 38 1st 7h Accel Decel Time FU2 71 Accel Decel Time Scale FU2 70 Reference Frequency for Accel Decel FU2 Acc Dec freq 70 Max freq 10 0 Factory Default Max freq 0 This is the reference frequency for acceleration and deceleration If a decided Accel Decel time from a frequency to a target frequency is required set this value to Delta freq FU2 gt Time scale 71 0 1 sec n 1 Factory Default 0 1 sec 0 1 This is used to change the time scale Related Functions DRV 01 DRV 02 Accel Decel Time FU2 70 Reference Freq for Accel Decel 1 0 25 1 0
63. change data by rotating knob Run Button is used to run the drive The motor direction is set in DRV 13 Program Button i used The Run LED blinks eoat E when the drive Accels or Enter Button is used to H O O Q Deca enter the changed data T PROG STOP The LED blinks during Stop Button is used to programming mode stop the drive from running Reset Button is used to reset Faults The LED blinks when there is a fault Parameter Group Display LEDs When parameter code is located on DRV 20 DRV 21 DRV 22 and DRV 23 respectively by rotating the encoder knob the parameter group display LEDs of DRV FUN1 FUN2 I O EXT blink LED Parameter Group Description DRV Drive Group Lit in Drive group Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 20 FUN1 FU FUNCTION 1 y ARON T aop Lit when FUNCTION 1 group is selected Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 21 FUN2 FU2 FUNCTION 2 G 53 Lit when FUNCTION 2 group is selected 1 0 Input Output Group Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 22 1 0 Lit when Input Output group is selected Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 23 EXT EXT Sub Board Group Lit when Sub Board group is selected This group appears only when a Sub Board is installed Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 24 EXT
64. constant for V1 signal input Increase this value if the V1 signal is affected by noise causing unstable operation of the inverter Increasing this value makes response time slower 1 0 V1 volt x1 02 0 00 V 0 00 V 0 00 02 0 00 Factory Default This is the minimum voltage of the V1 input at which inverter outputs minimum frequency 1 0 V1 freq yl 03 0 00 Hz 03 0 00 Factory Default 0 00 Hz 0 00 This is the inverter output minimum frequency when there is the minimum voltage 1 0 02 on the V1 terminal In torque mode the display is changed to 1 0 V1 volt x2 E O y 04 10 00 Factory Default 10 00 V 10 00 This is the maximum voltage of the V1 input at which inverter outputs maximum frequency 1 0 V1 freq y2 05 60 00 Hz 05 60 00 Factory Default 60 00 Hz 60 00 This is the inverter output maximum frequency when there is the maximum voltage O 03 on the V1 terminal In torque mode the display is changed to Setting FU2 39 Control mode select to Vector_Torque or Sensorless_T the setting value is changed to Torque value as below Code Factory Default Setting Range 1 0 02 0 V 0 10 VJ 1 0 03 0 0 150 110 04 10 V 0 10 VJ 110 05 100 0 150 Reference Frequency A 1 0 05 1 0 03 A Analog Voltage Input V1 1 0 02 1 0 04 Reference Frequency vs Analog Voltage Input V1 0 to 10V Related Functions DRV 04 Freque
65. contact input When a terminal set to Ext Trip A is ON inverter displays the fault and cuts off its output This can be used as an external latch trip Ext Trip B This is a normally closed contact input When a terminal set to Ext Trip B is OFF inverter displays the fault and cuts off its output This can be used as an external latch trip Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O iTerm Clear XCEL stop This function is used for PID control When this terminal Inverter stops accelerating and decelerating when this is ON the accumulated value by Gain is set to 0 terminal is ON Refer to PID Control Block Diagram P Gain2 Open loop This function is used to change P Gain during PID This is used to exchange the control mode of inverter operation When this terminal is ON PID controller from PID mode Close Loop to V F mode Open Loop changes P Gain with PID P2 Gian set in FU2 59 DRV 03 Drive Mode and DRV 04 Frequency Mode Refer to PID Control Block Diagram are applied when the mode has been changed Note This function can be used only when the inverter is SEQ L SEQ M SEQ H stopped These functions are used for Auto drive 1 0 50 Five different sequences can be selected according to Main drive the combination of these terminals Eight step When an option board like RS485 DeviceNet F Net is frequencies Accel Decel time and steady speed tim
66. control can be used to adjust the actual output by comparing a This code selects the direction of output value of PID controller The output value is added to Target frequency feedback with a Set point given to the inverter This Set point can be in the form of Speed Temperature Pressure Flow level etc The Set point and the feedback signals are provided externally to the inverter analog input terminals V1 V2 or The inverter compares the signals in calculating total error which is reflected in the inverter output FU2 51 PID Feedback Signal Selection FU2 52 P Gain for PID Control FU2 53 Time for PID Control FU2 54 D Time for PID Control FU2 55 High Limit Frequency for PID Control FU2 56 Low Limit Frequency for PID Control Please see FU2 50 to FU2 54 for more detail FU2 gt PID F B 31 0 al pa Note PID control can be bypassed to manual operation temporarily by defining one of the multifunction input terminals P1 P3 to Open loop The inverter will change to manual operation from PID control when this terminal is ON and change back to PID control when this terminal is OFF Factory Default I Select the feedback signal for PID control This can be set one of I 4 20mA V1 V2 according to the signal current or voltage and the terminal V1 0 10V or V2 Sub B board Refer to I O 6 10 for 1 1 01 5 for V1 and DRV 04 Fre
67. for PID control setting 2 Jog and Multi speed operation Parameter Name Code Description Multi function input 10 12 14 If 1 0 12 14 are set to Speed H Speed M Speed L terminal setting EXT2 4 multi speed operation up to speed 7 is available piter ume Sonan o 10 17 Effective for eliminating noise in the freq setting circuit input terminal DRV 05 7 Speed reference value 10 21 1 0 24 Speed reference value for each step setting AOUD ue 10 25 38 Accel Decel time for each step setting setting for each step Jog freq 1 0 20 Jog freq for jog operation setting Speed H Speed M Speed L JOG Speed Signal Parameter value 0 0 0 0 Speed 0 DRV 00 X X X 1 Jog freq 1 0 20 0 0 1 0 Speed 1 DRV 05 0 1 0 0 Speed 2 DRV 06 0 1 1 0 Speed 3 DRV 07 1 0 0 0 Speed 4 0 21 1 0 1 0 Speed 5 1 0 22 1 1 0 0 Speed 6 1 0 23 1 1 1 0 Speed 7 1 0 24 44 Chapter 3 Function Settings 3 Auto sequence operation If 1 O 50 Auto Sequence Operation selection is set to 1 Auto A or 2 Auto B up to 5 sequences can be set with max of 8 steps speed in each sequence Therefore max 40 operating steps can be made Two different types of auto sequence A B operation are available Parameter Name Code Description Auto operation setting 10 50 84 Sets 8 steps and 5 sequences Max 4 27 motor operation 27d function setting is required to
68. freq 08 5 00 Hz 08 5 00 Factory Default 5 00 Hz 5 00 FU1 gt DcBlk time 09 0 10 sec 09 0 10 Factory Default 0 10 sec 0 10 FU1 DcBr value 10 50 10 50 Factory Default 50 50 FU1 DcBr time 11 1 0 sec n 10 Factory Default 1 0 sec 10 Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU1 By introducing a DC voltage to the motor windings this function stops the motor immediately Selecting DC Brake in FU1 07 activates FU1 08 through FU1 11 FU1 08 DC Injection Braking Frequency is the frequency at which the inverter starts to output DC voltage during deceleration FU1 09 DC Injection Braking On delay Time is the inverter output blocking time before DC injection braking FU1 10 DC Injection Braking Voltage is the DC voltage applied to the motor and is based on FU2 33 Rated Current of Motor FU1 11 DC Injection Braking Time is the time the DC current is applied to the motor Output Frequency A FU1 08 DCBr Freq gt Time Output Voltage A t1 FU1 09 FU1 10 t2 FU1 11 DCBr Value l gt Time E t1 2 A Stop Command FX CM oN gt Time DC Injection Braking Operation Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU1 FU1 12 Starting DC Injection Braking Time Related Functions FU2 33 Rated Current of Motor FU1 13 Staring DC Injection Braking Time M FU2 33 the DC current is limited by this parameter Note The DC injection braking fu
69. in Sensorless vector OFF status DG Dd DA DA ASR P PI AXA AXC Q3 Q2 Q1 P or PI control select in Vector _SPD control Disabled in Sensorless vector 0 17 Filtering Time Constant for Multi function Input Terminals 1 0 15 Terminal Input Status I OPTi Filt Num 11 15 1 0 16 Terminal Output Status 17 15 1 0 In Status Factory Default 15 15 15 000000000 15 0000 This is the response time constant for terminal inputs JOG FX RX P3 P2 Pt RST BX This is useful where there is a potential for noise The response time is This code displays the input status of control terminals determined by Filtering time constant 0 5msec Terminals P4 P5 P6 and Q1 Q2 Q3 are provided on LCD Keypad Display 1 0 Jog freq 2 10 00 Input JOG FX RX P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 20 10 00 Hz 0 3 Terminals Bi i i i i i i i i oe S Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Factory Default OE 10 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 status This code sets the jog frequency See Speed L Speed ON status 1111111111111 1 1 1 M Speed H in 1 0 12 1 0 14 7 Segment Keypad Display 1 0 21 24 Step Frequency 4 5 6 7 The JOG terminal is not displayed on 7 Segment keypad 1 0 85 92 Step Frequency 8 9 10 11 12 15 ON status gt J MMM 1 0 gt Ste p freq 4 OFF status gt M4 nm bt 21 AO 00 ES 21 40 00 I O Step freq 7 This code displays the outpu
70. motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 20 Sec 6 Terminal FX 34 Chapter 2 Operation 2 5 2 Operation via Control Terminal Setting DRV 03 Drive Mode Run Stop method 1 Fx Rx 1 DRV 04 Frequency Mode Freq setting method 2 V1 1 Check the LCD display when Power ON Otherwise change the setting indicated above DRVPT V 0 0 A 00 STP 0 00Hz 2 Turn the FX or RX terminal ON Then FWD or REV LED will be lit DRVPT V 0 0 A 00 FWD 0 00Hz 3 Set the frequency using V1 Potentiometer Output freq 60Hz Rotating direction FWD or REV and output current 5A will be displayed on the LCD DRVPT V 504A 00 FWD 60 00Hz 4 Output freq value is decreasing when turning the potentiometer counterclockwise Inverter output stops at 0 00Hz and motor is stopped DRVPT V 0 0 A 00 FWD 0 00Hz 5 Turn FX or RX terminal OFF DRVPT V 0 0 A 00 STP 0 00Hz 35 Chapter 2 Operation Operation E AS Example 2 Analog Voltage Input V1 Operation via Terminal FX RX Operation condition Control mode V F control Reference Frequency 50 Hz analog input via V1 Potentiometer Accel Decel time Accel 10 Sec Decel 20 Sec Drive mode Run Stop via FX RX terminal Wiring e e PEA B1 B2 Ac o s v IM inputd oo T w e re G S W oO FX FM oso RX BX 5G RST JOG 30A P
71. not install the inverter in high temperature or high humidity locations e Do not install the inverter in a location where oil mist combustible gas or dust is present Install the inverter in a clean location or in an enclosed panel free of foreign substance e When installing the inverter inside a panel with multiple inverters or a ventilation fan use caution If installed incorrectly the ambient temperature may exceed specified limits Panel Panel Ventilating fan a 1 i pap pie mee ag 9S 1 A Inverter Vv A Inverter Inverter Inverter Cooling fan y A y A 7 gt Liz J Lira 4 GOOD 0 BAD X GOOD 0 BAD X When installing several inverters in a panel When installing a ventilating fan in a panel e Install the inverter using screws or bolts to insure the inverter is firmly fastened UL Remark File number E124949 Only intended for use in an enclosure with maximum surrounding air temperature of 45 C or equivalent Models SV022iS5 2 4 SV037iS5 2 4 SV055iS5 4 not 2 SV075iS5 4 not 2 V110iS5 2 4 SV150iS5 2 4 SV185iS5 2 4 and SV220iS5 2 4 Chapter 1 Installation 1 5 Dimensions E Frame 1 1 5 HP m Frame 2 7 5 10 HP
72. of the FU1 20 21 motor When you want to adjust the starting frequency FU1 22 When you want to limit the mechanical rotating speed to a fixed value FU1 23 25 When a large starting torque is needed for loads such as elevators Manual Auto Torque Boost FU1 26 28 When you want to select an appropriate output characteristic V F characteristic according to loads FU1 29 When you want to se up your own V F pattern FU1 30 37 When you want to adjust the output voltage of the inverter FU1 38 When you want to use the energy saving function FU1 39 When you want to protect the motor from overheating FU1 50 53 When you want to output a signal when the overload condition lasts more than a fixed amount of time FU1 54 55 When you want to cut off the output when the overload condition lasts more than a fixed amount of time FU1 56 58 When you want to set the stall prevention function FU1 59 60 FU2 Group When you want to check the fault history of the inverter FU2 01 06 When you want to use dwell function FU2 07 08 When you want to prevent the resonance from the oscillating characteristics of a machine FU2 10 16 When you want to protect inverter from input output phase loss FU2 19 When you want to start the inverter as soon as the power is turned ON FU2 20 When you want to restart the inverter by resetting the fault when a fault occur FU2 21 When you want to use the instant power failure restart function Speed Search FU2 22 25 When you want to us
73. run the two motors by one inverter by exchange If the terminal defined for 2 function signal input is turned ON 274 motor operation is valid Parameter Name Code Description Multi function input 10 12 14 214 motor operation is available with Multi function input terminals setting EXT2 4 terminals P1 P3 or P4 6 set to 7 274 Func Parameter setting for Setting parameters necessary to operate 2 motor such FU2 81 FU2 90 2 4 motor operation as base freq Accel Decl time Stall 5 Energy saving operation FU1 39 Energy Save Level tunes the inverter output voltage to minimize the inverter output voltage during during constant speed operation Appropriate for energy saving applications such as fan pump and HVAC 45 Chapter 3 Function Settings 3 2 Operation Example Operation Rg Example 1 VIF Control Analog Voltage Input V1 Operation via Terminal FX RX Operation condition Control mode V F control Frequency command 50 Hz analog input via V1 terminal Accel Decel time Accel 15 Sec Decel 25 Sec Drive mode Run Stop via FX RX terminal Wiring e e phe B1 B2 3p 0 0 0 R U ss AC 0 0 0 s vV M inputd o o T Wo re G S W oO FX FM Loto RX BX 5G RST JOG 30A Pi 30C ie 30B P3 cM AXA Potentiometer AXC 1 kohm 1 2W VR 5G Step Parameter setting Code Description 1 Control Mode Selection FU2
74. speed in RPM while the motor is running Use the following equation to scale the mechanical speed using FU2 74 Gain for Motor Speed display if you want to change the motor speed display to rotation speed r min or mechanical speed m min Motor speed 120 F P FU2 74 Where F Output Frequency and P the Number of Motor Poles DRV 10 DC Link Voltage DRV DC link vtg 10 10 a V Factory Default This code displays the DC link voltage inside the inverter DRV 11 User Display Selection DRV User disp 11 Out 0 0 V Factory Default 0 0 V 0 0 This code displays the parameter selected in FU2 73 User Display There are types of parameters in FU2 73 Voltage Watt and Torque DRV 12 Fault Display DRV Fault 12 None 12 non Factory Default None n n This code displays the current fault trip status of the inverter Use the PROG A and Y key before pressing the RESET key to check the fault content s output frequency output current and whether the inverter was accelerating decelerating or in constant speed at the time of the fault occurred Press the ENT key to exit The fault content will be stored in FU2 01 to FU2 05 when the RESET key is pressed For more detail please refer to Chapter 7 Fault Contents Fault Ti Keypad disp
75. the center of the ferrite core The earth conductor should be securely earthed at both inverter and motor ends The screen should be connected to the enclosure body via and earthed cable gland 7 Connect any control cables as instructed in the inverter instructions manual IT IS IMPORTANT THAT ALL LEAD LENGHTS ARE KEPT AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND THAT INCOMING MAINS AND OUTGOING MOTOR CABLES ARE KEPT WELL SEPARATED FF SERIES Footprint CABLE APANTALLADO SHIELDED CABLE MOTOR FILTER FE SERIES Standard CABLE APANTALLADO SHIELDED CABLE 196 EMI RFI POWER LINE FILTERS RFI Filters Footprint Standard for iS5 SERIES INTERNATIONAL CAPACITORS iS5 series Filtros Footprint Footprint Filters VARIADOR POT CODIGO INTENS TENSION SeFuGaS ST ene PESOS ea DE SALIDA INVERTER POWER CODE CURRENT VOLTAGE LEAKAGE WEIGHT mouNT OUTPUT CURRENT L WwW H Y X CHOKES TRIFASICOS THREE PHASE NOM MAX SV008iS5 2 SVOTSISED FFS5 T012 x 12A 250VAC 0 3A 18A 329x149 5x50 315x120 M5 FS 2 Se FFS5 T020 x 20A 250VAC 03A 18A 329x1495x50 315x120 M5 FS 2 SV055iS5 2 5 5kW FFS5 T030 x 250VAC 0 3A 18A 415x199 5x60 401x160 M5 FS 2 SV075iS5 2 7 5kW FFS5 T050 x 50A 250VAC 0 3A 18A 415x199 5x60 401x160 M5 FS 2 SV110iS
76. the frequency of the inverter Make sure this maximum rated magnetic flux pre excitation current starts to frequency does not exceed the rated speed of the motor decrease When the motor magnetic flux reaches to the FU1 21 Base Frequency is the frequency where the rated magnetic flux the pre excitation current matches inverter outputs its rated voltage In case of using a the rated pre excitation current 50Hz motor set this to 50Hz FU1 22 Starting Frequency is the frequency where the inverter starts to output its voltage per Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU1 Output Sa Output Frequency Rated ccmmmmmnnnny i Reference Frequency Curve Voltage Freq Max FU1 24 Output Frequency Curve FU1 25 E Output Fa Ti F Time FU1 22 gr FU1 21 ae ee FU1 20 Freq limit Yes Note If the command frequency is set lower than the starting frequency inverter does not output voltage to Note Frequency limit does not work during accelerating motor and decelerating FU1 23 Frequency Limit Selection FU1 26 Manual Auto Boost Selection FU1 24 Low Limit Frequency FU1 27 Torque Boost in Forward Direction FU1 25 High Limit Frequency FU1 28 Torque Boost in Reverse Direction FUl gt Freq limit FUlPTorque boost 23 0 E 23 No 26 Manual 26 0 Factory Default No 0 Factory Default Manual 0 FU1 F limit Lo FU1 Fwd boost 24 0 50 Hz 24 0 30 27 2 0 21 Factory D
77. to the manual torque boost value Note Auto torque boost is available only when FU2 40 Control Mode is set to V F Note Conduct Auto tuning in FU2 41 Auto tuning to use Auto torque boost effectively Output Voltage 1 00 ca tal Forward and Reverse direction Set the same value for FU1 27 Me and FU1 28 Boost Value Y Output x Frequency Freq Base Constant Torque Loads Conveyor Moving Equip etc Output Voltage 1 00 linia a dl r Forward Direction Motoring Set FU1 27 to a value Reverse Direction Regenerating Set FU1 28 to 0 Output Frequency FU1 21 Ascending and Descending Loads Parking Hoist etc Related Functions FU1 29 Volts Hz Pattern FU2 40 Control Mode selection FU1 29 Volts Hz Pattern FU1 V F pattern 29 Linear 29 0 Linear Factory Default This is the pattern of voltage frequency ratio Select the proper V F pattern according to the load The motor torque is dependent on this V F pattern Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU1 Linear pattern is used where constant torque is required This pattern maintains a linear volts frequency ratio from zero to base frequency This pattern is appropriate for constant torque applications Square pattern is used where variable torque is required This pattern maintains squared volts hertz ratio This pattern is appropriate fo
78. unstable tuning y y FU2 T3 Displayed during Stator 40 Ls Tuning inductance Ls and No load FU2 SL I gain 46 100 current auto tuning 46 100 T4 Displayed during Encod to ENC Test PEN dE A Factory Default 100 100 T5 Displayed during Rotor filter bo i f A Tr Tuning reta i ar iT auto tuning SL l gain is the integral gain of speed controller If this value is set low you can get better transient response characteristic and steady state characteristic However if this value is set too low there may be an overshoot in speed control 10 co Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 When it is set to 100 the responsiveness of output F gain value from controller reference value is 100 Used when fast response is needed Caution Control System output may become unstable if this value is set too high Note The response time of a system is affected by the load inertia For better control performance set the FU2 37 Load Inertia correctly Related Functions FU2 30 FU2 37 Motor Parameters FU2 40 Control Method FU2PAUx Ref Mode 49 None 49 0 Factory Default None 0 FU2 47 PID Operation Selection This code selects reference input for PID control FU2 Proc PI mode 41 0 AD RENO AE FU2 gt PID Out Dir 50 Target Fre 50 0 Factory Default No 0 g ES Factory Default Target Freq 0 This code selects the PID control For HVAC or Pump applications the PID
79. 0 SHIFT ESC O O O STOP 79 2334 130 124 120 7 5 2 7 Segment Keypad Weight 110g Unit mm 130 124 120 79 23 34 165 Chapter 7 Options 7 5 3 RS485 Communication The serial interface supports operation configuration and monitoring of inverter functions through RS485 connection 1 Terminal block configuration pep tnitots tu 2 Terminal Description Terminal Name Description Short the terminal to connect the termination resistor on 71 72 board S SHEILD G Power grounding terminal for RS485 p Connect the RS485 signal High Signal input output terminal for RS 485 N Connect the RS485 signal Low Reference terminal for RS 485 7 5 4 Remote cable Ordering Number Description 051050025 Remote cable 2m 051050026 Remote cable 3m 051050027 Remote cable 5m 166 Chapter 7 Options 7 6 DB Resistors 1 Internal DB Resistor SV iS5 inverters up to 3 7kW have built in DB resistor on Power stack as factory installation Installing the external DB resistor Optional kit is strongly recommended when the unit is used for continuous operation or motor rating is above 3 7kW Voltage Applied motor Operating rate Built in DB resistor dl c
80. 0 32 Accel Time 5 1 0 34 j 0 j Decel Time 5 1 0 35 Accel Time 6 1 0 36 i 1 0 Decel Time 6 1 0 37 Accel Time 7 1 0 38 1 1 1 Decel Time 7 1 0 39 0 OFF 1 ON Output Frequency Ref Freq _ _____________________ ____s Time nes Time 1 E Time 2 E Time 3 Time 4 Time 5 Time 6 l Time 7 E p1 cm ON ON ON ON l aie Geo ee oe ee LL P2 CM ON ON l n i i i gt Time P3 CM ON y gt Time A FX CM ON gt Time Multi Accel Decel Time Operation Related Functions 1 0 25 1 0 38 1st 7 Accel Decel Time 122 Dc brake DC Injection Braking can be activated during inverter stopped by configuring one of the multi function input terminals P1 P2 P3 to Dc bake To activate the DC Injection Braking close the contact on the assigned terminal while the inverter is stopped Exchange Exchange is used to bypass the motor from the inverter line to commercial power or the opposite To bypass the motor to commercial line set the Exchange function in multi function output terminal and INV line COMM line function in multi function output terminal Speed search function FU2 22 is activated automatically during exchanging operation MCCB Forward Run Sbp ae O FX Reverse Run Sbp gt Reene RUSS ae A AC220V Line A 1 kohm 1 2W Power supplyfor VR speed signal 11V 10mA y4 Speed signa
81. 0 to FU1 20 0 00 Hz Input Minimum e Frequency i Pulse Input Maximum 0 F pulsex2 0 to 100 kHz 10 00 kHz Yes 139 Frequency Frequency Output Corresponding to Pulse 0 to FU1 20 60 00 Hz Yes Input Maximum Frequency EXT 22 P Gain for Sub B PG P gain a F to 9999 a EXT 23 l Gain for Sub B PG I gain otogg99 to 9999 es Slip Frequency for EXT 24 PG Slip Freq 0 to 200 100 140 Sub B Board P Gain f i ExT 25 Cain for ASRP Gain 10 to 500 0 1 100 0 Yes Sensored Vector_SPD l Gain for E EXT 26 ASR I Gain 10 to 9999 ms 200 ms Sensored Vector_SPD i EXT 27 Forward ips Limit Trq Limit 0 to 200 gt 1 180 EXT 28 Trq Limit ES Lost Command Multi Function Output Run Terminal Q1 Define Sees Stop Steady INVIine COMM line Ssearch Step pulse Seq pulse Ready Tw ACC Tv DEC Zspd Dect i Torq Dect 72 140 oO AN DOA A Ww NA SO N RO BRO BD NNa A cd oh oh o do ooh ol o A U N gt O O WAN Do Rh WwW MY O Chapter 5 Parameter List Keypad Displa Factory Adi Code Description ye P y ng mg Beat real Page 7 Segment 7 Segment Multi function Output EXT 31 see Q2 define FDT 2 Terminal Q2 Define Same as Above 140 Multi function Output EXT 32 a AA Q3 define FDT 3 Terminal Q3 Define Frequency E Current LM Load Meter Output Voltage Current Selection DC link Vtg
82. 00Q HEX Yes ovoos7F HEx o000 HExX Yes 0000 S7FFHEX 0000 HEX Yes 0000 57FF HEX oo00 Hex Yes _ ovoos7F HEX 0000 HEX Yes oooosS7FF HEX 0000 HEX Yes ModB COM 52 ModBus Option Selection ModBus Mode ModBus RTU MEE COM 99 Return Code Not displayed Not available 1 Yes SHIFT ESC 5 7 Application Group APP Keypad Display Setting Range Facto dal Code Description E Default During Page 7 Segment Run Jump code Not di Application Mode Traverse None No 145 Selection MMC DRAW APP 02 Traverse Amplitude 0 0 to 20 0 0 0 APP 04 Traverse Accel Time Trv Acc Time 0 1 to 6000 sec 2 0 sec 146 APP 05 Traverse Decel Time Trv Dec Time 0 1 to 6000 sec 0 1 3 0 sec Yes 146 Yes Traverse Offset Hi APP 06 Trv Off Hi 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 0 0 Yes 147 Setting Traverse Offset Lo APP 07 Seti Trv Off Lo 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 0 0 1 etting Traverse Scramble APP 03 Trv Ser 0 0 to 50 0 0 1 0 0 Yes 146 Amplitude 146 Running Auxiliary Motor APP 0829 i Aux Mot Run Number Display 28 Code APP 02 through APP 07 appears only when APP 01 is set to Traverse 29 Code APP 08 through APP 31 appears only when APP 01 is set to MMC 75 Chapter 5 Parameter List Starting Aux Starting Aux Motor APP 09 4 Selection APP 10 Operation Time Display on Auto Change Start freq 1 Start freq 2 Start
83. 0iS5 4 FE T070 2 380VAC 350 x 180 x 90 338 x 146 SV370iS5 4 SV450iS5 4 45kW FE T100 2 380VAC 425 x 200 x 130 408 x 166 SV550IS5 4 55KW FE T120 2 120A 380VAC 1 3mA 150mA 425 x 200x 130 408 x 166 FS 3 SV750iS5 4 75kW FE T170 2 170A 380VAC 1 3mA 150mA 480x200x160 468 x 166 FS 3 DIMENSIONS FF SERIES Footprint FE SERIES Standard af f MILI DDD Donna roD00n gt meg LI ce T a yo o a son ep i a 8 lt 18 W X a amp lo 5 NE ele w xp j t ES a Lal Im E A o 9 giii i i L FS SERIES output chokes O fo i TIPO D W H X O gt FS 1 21 85 46 70 5 A FS 2 28 5 105 62 90 5 3 KEC Iv FS 4 sokas 57 5 o w gt Pol gono Industrial de Palou 08400 Granollers Barcelona SPAIN ESPA A Tel 34 93 861 14 60 Fax 34 93 879 26 64 E mail info lifasa com vsd lifasa es http www lifasa com INTERNATIONAL CAPACITORS 198 Revisions ALIS Changes to be made A Note date Version 1 Feb 1999 1 00 2 April 2000 1 03 3 March 2001 1 05 4 July 2001 1 06 5 May 2002 1 07 6 June 2002 2 00 7 Dec 2002 2 01 Chapter 7 DB Unit Models and description added e Janaa Appendix C A Peripheral devices added or c
84. 1 30C EE 308 P3 cM AXA Potentiometer AXC kohm 1 2W tp vi 5G Step Parameter setting Code Description 1 Control Mode Selection FU2 39 Set it to 0 V F 2 Drive Mode DRV 3 Set it to 1 Fx Rx 1 3 Frequency Mode DRV 4 Set it to 2 V1 Analog input 4 eta freg command DRV 0 Set freq command 50 Hz via V1 potentiometer setting 5 Accel Decel time DRV 2 Set Accel time to 10 Sec in DRV 2 DRV 3 Set Decel time to 20 Sec in DRV 3 Motor starts to rotate in Forward direction at 50Hz with Accel time 10 sec when FX terminal is turned ON Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 20 sec when FX terminal is turned OFF When RX terminal is turned ON motor starts to rotate in Reverse 7 Terminal RX direction at 50 Hz with Accel time 10 Hz When it is OFF motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 20 Sec 6 Terminal FX 36 Chapter 2 Operation 2 5 3 Operation via Keypad Setting DRV 03 Drive Mode Run Stop method 0 Keypad DRV 04 Frequency Mode Freq setting method 0 Keypad 1 1 Check the LCD display when Power ON Otherwise change the setting indicated above DRVPK K 004A 00 STP 0 00Hz 2 Set the Ref Freq to 60 Hz using PROG ENT SHIFT A keys Setting freq is displayed during stop DRVPK K 004A 00 STP 60 00Hz 3 When pressing FWD REV key motor starts running and output freq and output current are displayed DRVPK K
85. 16 Pre excitation current setting FU1 15 Hold time at a stop setting When stopping FU1 7 Stopping method selection This parameter can limit the over speeding motor running above limit level of the motor when FU2 39 Control mode is set to 5 Vector_TRQ Parameter Name Code Description ee EXT 50 n Speed limit level i Function to limit the speed and change reference torque bias gain EXT 53 value according to speed 4 Parameters to monitor motor and inverter status Parameter Name Code Description Purpur ote DRV 8 9 Displays output current and motor rpm motor speed DC link voltage DRV 10 Displays DC link voltage User display selection DRV 11 Either output voltage or power selected in FU2 73 is Voltage and watt FU2 73 displayed in DRV11 casal eos DRV 15 Displays Reference Feedback frequency display frequency display Fault display DRV 14 Displays the current inverter fault 42 Chapter 3 Function Settings 5 Parameter initialize Parameter Name Code Description Software version FU2 79 Displays the inverter software version FU2 91 FU2 91 FU2 92 Copying parameters from other Parameter FU2 92 inverter Read Write Initialize Lock FU2 93 FU2 93 Initializing parameters to factory setting values FU2 94 FU2 94 Parameter write disabled Note Motor parameters FU2 31 37 FU2 41 44 are back to factory setting once Paramet
86. 2 17 Chapter 1 Installation Wires and Terminal Lugs Refer to the following table for wires terminal lugs and screws used to connect the inverter power input R S T and output U V W Input and motor output terminal blocks are intended only for use with ring type connectors Terminal Screw Torque Ring Terminal Wire Inverter Capacity Screw Kgf cm DI AnaS mm AWG Size lb in RST UVW RST UVW RST U V W 0 75 2 2kW 1 3HP M3 5 7 1 12 2 6 2 10 6 2 4 2 4 2 2 14 14 3 7 kW 5HP M3 5 7 1 12 2 6 2 10 6 2 4 2 4 3 5 3 5 12 12 5 5 kW 7 5HP M4 7 1 12 2 6 2 10 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 7 5 kW 10HP M4 7 1 12 2 6 2 10 6 14 5 8 5 14 8 6 8 200V 11 kW 15HP M5 24 5 31 8 21 2 27 6 14 5 14 5 14 14 6 6 Class 15 kW 20HP M5 24 5 31 8 21 2 27 6 22 6 22 6 22 22 4 4 18 5 kW 25HP M6 30 6 38 2 26 6 33 2 38 8 38 8 30 30 2 2 22 kW 30HP M6 30 6 38 2 26 6 33 2 38 8 38 8 38 30 2 2 30 37 kW 40 50HP M8 61 2 91 8 53 1 79 7 60 8 60 8 60 60 2 0 2 0 45 55 kW 60 75HP M10 89 7 122 0 77 9 105 9 100 10 100 10 100 100 4 0 4 0 0 75 3 7 kW 1 5HP M3 5 7 1 12 2 6 2 10 6 2 4 2 4 2 2 14 14 5 5 kW 7 5HP M4 7 1 12 2 6 2 10 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 5 2 12 14 7 5 kW 10HP M4 7 1 12 2 6 2 10 6 14 5 8 5 3 5 3 5 12 12 11 kW 15HP M5 24 5 31 8 21 2 27 6 14 5 14 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 400V 15 kW 20HP M5 24 5 31 8 21
87. 2 FU2 25 When an under voltage LV fault inverter disable BX 10 wo Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 or Arm short occurs the drive does not restart automatically Output Frequency A t FU2 27 gt Time 1 Fault 2 Fault Restart with Restart with Speed Search Speed Search Note Inverter decreases the retry number by one as a fault occurs When restarted without a fault during 30 seconds the inverter increases the retry number by one FU2 28 Speed search hold time FU2P SS blk time 28 1 0 sec 28 10 Factory Default 1 0 sec 1 0 The inverter starts speed search function after the preset time t1 elapses Set the desired time for inverter to restart the previous operation using Speed search function Speed search function FU2 22 is activated automatically during exchanging function Input power v l Time sec Motor speed rpm Output vtg V Time sec Time sec t1 Ssearch wait time t2 Ssearch Accel time t3 Ssearch Decel time t Note This parameter is not valid when low voltage LV fault or instant power loss within 15msec occurs FU2 30 Rated Motor Selection FU2 31 Number of Motor Pole FU2 32 Rated Motor Slip FU2 33 Rated Motor Current FU2 34 No Load Motor Current nie Factory Setting FU2 36 Motor Efficiency Code Keypad display Description aie Rand FU2 37 Load Inertia Speed search
88. 2 17 5 22 9 28 2 33 5 Output FLA A 5 8 12 16 24 32 46 60 74 88 Ratings Frequency 0 400 Hz Sensorless Vector Control 0 300Hz Sensored Vector Control 0 120 Hz Voltage 200 230 V3 Input Voltage 3 Phase 200 230 V 10 Ratings Frequency 50 60 Hz 5 Braking Circuit On Board On Board i He Optional DB Resistor Dynamic asa 100 100 100 Braking k 20 Max Continuous eee 5 seconds 5 seconds Continuous 15 seconds Baking Time Max Duty 3 ED 2 ED 10 ED Weight kg 47 47 48 49 7 1 7 1 13 9 14 4 20 20 230V Class 40 75HP Model Number SV xxx iS5 2 300 370 450 550 Motor HP 40 50 60 75 Rating KW 30 37 45 55 Capacity kVA 46 55 68 84 Output FLA A 122 146 180 220 Ratings Frequency 0 400 Hz Sensorless Vector Control 0 300Hz Sensored Vector Control 0 120 Hz Voltage 200 230 V 3 Input Voltage 3 Phase 200 230 V 10 Ratings Frequency 50 60 Hz 5 Braking Circuit Optional Braking Unit Resistor Max Braking Dynamic Torque Braking Max Continuous 20 Continuous Baking Time Max Duty Weight kg 42 42 61 61 1 Indicates the maximum applicable capacity when using a 4 Pole LG motor Rated capacity y 3 V l is based on 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class 3 Maximum output voltage will not be greater than the input voltage Output voltage less than the input voltage may be programmed 1 1 5 HP inverters have internal braking resistors as standard 7 5 100 HP
89. 2 27 6 22 6 22 6 14 8 6 8 Class 18 5 kW 25HP M6 30 6 38 2 26 6 33 2 38 8 38 8 14 8 6 8 22 kW 30HP M6 30 6 38 2 26 6 33 2 38 8 38 8 22 14 4 6 30 37 kW 40 50HP M8 61 2 91 8 53 1 79 7 38 8 38 8 22 22 4 4 45 55 kW 60 75HP M8 61 2 91 8 53 1 79 7 38 8 38 8 38 38 2 2 75 kW 100HP M8 61 2 91 8 53 1 79 7 60 8 60 8 60 60 2 0 2 0 m Power and Motor Connection Ris t Gn et e2 ul v w Motor should be connected to the 3 Phase Power Input Power supply must be connected to the R S and T terminals Connecting it to the U V and W terminals causes internal damages to the inverter Arranging the phase sequence is not necessary ZN U V and W terminals If the forward command FX is on the motor should rotate counter clockwise when viewed from the load side of the motor If the motor rotates in the reverse switch the U and V terminals Apply the rated torque to terminal screws Loose screws can cause of short circuit or malfunction Tightening the screws too much can damage the terminals and cause a short circuit or malfunction 1 Use copper wires only with 600V 75 ratings 1 8 Control Terminals Chapter 1 Installation Type Symbol Name Description P1 P2 P3 Multi Function Input Used for Multi Function Input Terminal be ms 1 2 3 Factory default is set to Multi Step Frequency 1 2 3 2 FX Forward Run Co
90. 22KW 15KW X XXX XXX XX mH XXX ohm mH ms Code LCD display Name Description 18 5 kW XX XXXX yyy XXX FU2 hive aj Setting and display the We ok i aoe mH enol m Noload Curr No Load Motor Current OE r OASE ein SEPAC parame MEIS NO 34 Current RMS displayed RMS S Auto tuning Auto Tuning Auto tuning enable Related Functions FU2 30 37 Motor related parameters FU2 39 Control mode selection FU2 Rs Stator Setting and display the EXT 01 Sub Board Type Display 41 resistance Stator resistance Rs EXT 14 Encoder Feedback Frequency FU2 Lsigma Leakage Setting and display the EXT 15 Pulse Input Signal Selection 42 inductance Lsigma FU2 ls Stator Setting and display the 43 inductance Stator inductance Ls FU2 45 P Gain for Sensorless Control FU2 Tr Rotor Setting and display the 2 46 Gain for Sensorless Control 44 constant Rotor constant Tr FU2P SL P gain Keypad display during Auto tuning of motor parameters e oi 45 1000 Display ipti Factory Default 1000 1000 Code LED 7 50 Description ry Rs Tuning T1 Displayed during Stator SL P gain is the proportional gain of speed controller If resistance Rs Auto tuning this value is set high you can get fast speed response 3 T2 Displayed during Leakage nae eae l Lsigma inductance Lsigma auto characteristic However if this value is set too high the Tuning i steady state characteristics may become
91. 2400 TYPE 3 18 5 25 5 15 Sec 9 2400 TYPE 3 5 3600 TYPE 3 22 30 5 15 Sec 8 2800 TYPE 3 5 3600 TYPE 3 30 40 10 6 Sec 4 2 6400 37 50 10 6 Sec 4 2 6400 45 60 10 6 Sec 2 8 9600 55 75 10 6 Sec 2 8 9600 0 75 1 5 15 Sec 900 100 TYPE 1 600 150 TYPE 1 1 5 2 5 15 Sec 450 200 TYPE 1 300 300 TYPE 1 2 213 5 15 Sec 300 300 TYPE 1 200 400 TYPE 1 3 7 5 5 15 Sec 200 500 TYPE 2 130 600 TYPE 2 5 5 7 5 5 15 Sec 120 700 TYPE 3 85 1000 TYPE 3 7 51 10 5 15 Sec 90 1000 TYPE 3 60 1200 TYPE 3 11 15 5 15 Sec 60 1400 TYPE 3 40 2000 TYPE 3 0 15 20 5 15 Sec 45 2000 TYPE 3 30 2400 TYPE 3 Y 18 5 25 5 15 Sec 35 2400 TYPE 3 20 3600 TYPE 3 22 30 5 15 Sec 30 2800 TYPE 3 20 3600 TYPE 3 30 40 10 6 Sec 16 9 6400 37 50 10 6 Sec 16 9 6400 45 60 10 6 Sec 11 4 9600 55 75 10 6 Sec 11 4 9600 75 100 10 6 Sec 8 4 12800 168 Chapter 7 Options 3 DB Resistor Wiring When wiring connect the DB Resistor as SHORT as possible e DB resistor wiring for 1 5 HP Inverter DB Resistor Max distance between inverter and DB Resistor 5m Analog freq output 2 0 10V O FWD Run Stop FM REV Run Stop RX Max Current thru PC 5mA O P1 Multi function input terminal C p2 1 0 12 Setting Ext Trip B DB resistor terminal Terminal description B1 B2 Connect the DB Resistor to Inverter terminal B1 B2 Thermal sensors provided with the DB res
92. 38 1s 7h Accel Decel Time Setting Range LCD 7 Seg Description The Accel Decel time is changed by 0 01 second The maximum setting range is 600 seconds 0 01 sec 0 The Accel Decel time is changed by 0 1 second The maximum setting range is 6000 seconds 0 1 sec 1 The Accel Decel time is changed by 1 second The maximum setting range is 60000 seconds 1 sec 2 FU2 72 Power On Display FU2 PowerO0n disp Factory Default 0 0 This code selects the parameter to be displayed first on keypad DRV 00 when the power is turned on Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 Related Functions DRV 00 Output Frequency Setting Ave DRV 09 Motor Speed Range Description FU2 31 Number of Motor Pole 0 DRV 00 Command Frequency 1 DRV 01 Acceleration Time 2 DRV 02 Deceleration Time FU2 75 DB Dynamic Braking Resistor Mode 3 DRV 03 Drive Mode Selection 4 DRV 04 Frequency Mode 5 DRV 05 Step Frequency 1 FU2P DB mode 15 1 6 DRV 06 Step Frequency 2 15 Int DB R l DEVO Ep Frequency a Factory Default Int DB R 1 8 DRV 08 Output Current 9 DRV 09 Motor Speed This code is used to protect the DB resistor from over 10 DRV 10 DC link Voltage heating 11 DRV 11 User Display selected in FU2 73 Setting Range Description 12 DRV 12 Fault Display LCD 7 Seg T
93. 4 Frequency Mode are applied when the mode has been changed gt Time gt Note This function can be used only when the inverter is t d P1 CM T eee Analog hold j gt Time Go step This is used to trigger the next step in a sequence of Analog hold Operation Auto B operation 124 Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O Hold step Trv Off Lo This is used to hold the last step frequency in Auto A This function is used to make negative offset during operation traverse operation Related Functions 1 0 51 1 0 84 Sequence Operation Related Functions APP 06 APP 07 Traverse Offset Output Frequency Trv Off Hi Sequence1 Sequence3 Sequence 2 This function is used to make positive offset during SEQ1 2F l traverse operation SEQ2 2F Related Functions APP 06 APP 07 Traverse Offset SEQ1 1F Interlock1 2 3 4 SEQ3 2F This function is used for MMC operation Refer to MMC operation RES Related Functions APP 29 Inter Lock Selection E ON me Reset This function is set to use it as fault reset terminal when P2 CMf l y l ON SEQ M ON gt Time P3 CMt Go step ON ON ON ON ON BX gt Time This function is set to use it as Emergency Stop terminal ee when ON Minimum 100msec Go step in Auto B Operation JOG This function is se
94. 4 No Load Motor Current RMS FU1 16 Pre excitation Current 90 Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU1 FU1 15 Hold Time Code LCD display Factory setting Setting range FU1 16 Flux Force 100 100 500 FU1P Hold Time 15 1000 ms 15 1000 Factory Default 1000 ms 1000 Motor magnete flux To set the time to maintain holding torque at zero speed and stop the operation in a shortest time during Vector _SPD mode operation e The inverter runs to maintain speed 0 for the hold FX 0M time in Vector_SPD mode and decelerates to stop after the hold time elapse Exciting current Related Functions FU2 34 No Load Motor Current RMS FU1 14 Pre excitation Time Output Speed Hz or Rpm Output FU1 20 Maximum Frequency Voltage FU1 21 Base Frequency V FU1 22 Starting Frequency Hold time FU1L gt Max freq 20 60 00 Hz 20 60 00 gt Operation method during Hold Time Factory Default en 60 00 FU1 7 Stop mode Decel zero speed control FU1 7 Stop mode DC brake FU Base freq 21 60 00 Hz 21 60 00 FU1 16 Pre excitation Current Factory Default 60 00 Hz 60 00 eee Flux ae 16 100 0 16 100 0 FU Start freq 22 0 50 22 0 50 Hz Factory Default 100 0 100 0 Factory Default 0 50 Hz 0 50 FU1 16 Pre excitation Current is applied during FU1 14 FU1 20 Maximum Frequency is the maximum output When the motor magnetic flux increases to match
95. 5 14 6 14 6 14 6 70A 0 20 mH 59A 0 74mH 56A SV150iS5 2 20 D125U EBS203b GMC 100 22 4 22 4 146 100 A 0 15mH 75A 0 57mH 71A sv185is5 2 25 TS250U EBS203b GMC 125 30 3 30 3 22 4 100 A 0 12 mH 96 A 0 49 mH 91 A Sv220i85 2 30 TS250U EBS203b GMC 150 38 2 30 3 22 4 125A 0 10mH 112A 0 42 mH 107 A sv300is5 2 40 TS250U EBS203b GMC 180 60 2 0 60 2 0 22 4 190 A 0 07 mH 160 A 0 34 mH 152 A SV370i85 2 50 TS400U EBS403b GMC 220 60 2 0 60 2 0 22 4 220A 0 06 mH 191 A 0 29 mH 181 A SV450iS5 2 60 TS400U EBS403b GMC 300 100 4 0 100 4 0 38 2 270A 0 05 mH 223A 0 29 mH 233 A SV550iS5 2 75 TS800U EBS603b GMC 400 100 4 0 100 4 0 38 2 330 A 0 04 mH 285 A 0 25 mH 270 A SV008iS5 4 1 TD125U EBS33b GMC 9 2 14 2 14 2 14 6A 8 63 mH 2 8A 28 62 mH 2 7 A SV015iS5 4 2 TD125U EBS33b GMC 9 2 14 2 14 2 14 10A 4 81 mH 4 8A 16 14 mH 4 6 A SV022i85 4 3 TD125U EBS33b GMC 12 2 14 2 14 2 14 10A 3 23 mH 7 5A 11 66 mH 7 1A SV037iS5 4 5 TD125U EBS33b GMC 18 2 14 2 14 214 20 A 2 34mH 10A 7 83mH 10A SVo55iS5 4 7 5 TO125U EBS33b GMC 22 3 5 12 2 14 3 512 20A 1 22mH 15A 5 34mH 14A SVO75iS5 4 10 TD125U EBS33b GMC 32 3 5 12 3 5 12 3 5 12 30 A 1 14mH 20A 4 04mH 19A SV110iS5 4 15 TD125U EBS53b GMC 40 5 5 10 5 5 10 8 8 35 A 0 81 mH 30 A 2 76 mH 29 A SV150iS5 4 20 TD125U EB
96. 5 2 TIKW SEISA ERN 100A 250VAC 0 3A 18A FS 3 SV185iS5 2 18kW SVINE at 120A 250VAC 0 3A 18A FS 3 SV008iS5 4 0 8KW SV015iS5 4 15KW FFS5 T006 x 6A 380VAC 0 5A 27A 329 x 149 5 x 50 315 x 120 M5 FS 1 V022iS5 4 2 2kW El 37m FFSST012 x 12A 380VAC 0 5A 27A 329x1495x50 315x120 M5 FS 2 SVO055iS5 4 5 5KW SV075iS5 4 75KW FFS5 T030 x 30A 380VAC 0 5A 27A 415 x 199 5 x 60 401 x 160 M5 FS 2 SV110iS5 4 11kW SASA gkW FFS5 T051 x 380VAC 0 5A 27A 466x258x65 440 5 x 181 M8 FS 2 SV185i55 4 18kW FFS5 T060 x 380VAC 0 5A 27A 541x332x65 515 5x 255 M8 FS 2 SV220iS5 4 22kW FFS5 T070 x 380VAC 0 5A 27A 541x332x65 515 5x 255 M8 FS 2 iS5 series Filtros Est ndar Standard Filters VARIADOR por CODIGO wrens TENSION Derueas DIMENSIONES MONTAJE peso TORNLLOS DE SALIDA INVERTER POWER CODE CURRENT VOLTAGE LEAKAGE WEIGHT MOUNT OUTPUT CURRENT L W H Y X CHOKES TRIFASICOS THREE PHASE NOM MAX SV008iS5 2 O 8kW SVORIS a E T012 x 250VAC 250 x 110 x60 238 x 76 FS 2 V022iS5 2 2 2kW VOTES 370 PE T0204 x 250VAC 270 x 140 x 60 258 x 106 FS 2 SV055iS5 2 5 5kW FE T030 x 30A 250VAC 0 3A 18A 270x140 x60 258 x 106 FS 2 SV075iS5 2 7 5kW FE T050 x 50A 250VAC 0 3A 18A 270x140 x 90 258 x 106 FS 2 SV110iS5 2 11kW SV150iS5 2 15KW FE T100 x 100A 250VAC 0 3A 18A 420 x 200 x 130 408 x 166 FS 3 SV185iS5 2 18kW ES zy FE T120 x 120A 250VAC 1 3A 180A 420x200x130 408
97. 504A 00 FWD 60 00Hz 4 Press STOP RESET key Then motor decelerates to stop Setting freq 60Hz is displayed DRVPK K 00A 00 STP 60 00Hz 37 CHAPTER 3 3 1 Function Setting 3 1 1 It is the basic function setting All settings are factory defaults unless users make change It is recommended to use VARIOUS FUNCTION SETTING amp DESCRIPTION Basic function parameter setting factory setting value unless the parameter change is necessary 1 Common parameter setting The following table shows common parameter setting that should be checked before use but making change does not affect inverter control type Parameter Name Code Description Motor Selection FU2 30 Selects motor and voltage rating suitable to the desired inverter Basic parameter value setting when selecting the motor rating Motor parameters FU2 31 36 t Note If there is any discrepancy between parameter preset value and the actual motor parameter value change the parameter value according to the actual motor Drive Mode DRV 3 Operation via Keypad Fx Rx 1 Fx Rx 2 setting Peduni Frequency Torque setting parameter Ai ie de DRV 4 It automatically changes to torque mode when FU2 39 q Control mode is set to Sensorless_T Vector _TRQ Asc IDC Ume DRV 1 DRV 2 Accel Decel time setting setting 2 Vif control FU2 39 Control mode is set to 0 V F as factory setting Operation via V F control can be perform
98. 9 Hz 14 49 99 Factory Default 49 99 Hz 49 99 The inverter turns on AUX RLY1 RLY2 and RLY3 in Chapter 6 Parameter Description APP order if the output frequency is over the frequencies set in APP 11 to APP 14 respectively and the time is over APP 19 APP 15 Stop Frequency of Aux Motor 1 APP 16 Stop Frequency of Aux Motor 2 APP 17 Stop Frequency of Aux Motor 3 APP 18 Stop Frequency of Aux Motor 4 APP gt Stop freql 15 15 00 Hz 15 15 00 Factory Default 15 00 Hz 15 00 APP Stop freg2 16 15 00 Hz 16 15 00 Factory Default 15 00 Hz 15 00 APPP Stop freg3 11 15 00 17 15 00 Hz i Factory Default 15 00 Hz 15 00 APP gt Stop freq4 18 15 00 Hz 18 15 00 Factory Default 15 00 Hz 15 00 The inverter turns off RLY3 RLY2 RLY1 and AUX in order if the output frequency is below the frequencies set in APP 15 to APP 18 respectively and the time is over APP 20 Output Freier Aux start DT APP 19 ua o errr ws Frequency rise according to Start freq 1 IN y APP 19 APP 11 Stop freq 1 APP 15 Frequency drop according to Ko i NAP Starting ES i Freq Aux stop DT APP 20 gt Flow When the Flow Ba increse al meake When the Flow ANSP decrease Stop Aux Motor Start Stop with MMC APP 21 The Number of Aux Motors APPPNbr Aux s a 7 21 4 Factory Default 4 Sets the number of auxiliary motors connected to the inverter APP 22 PID B
99. 99 500 225 460 150 eoo Hinode go0FH 150S iS5 4 Elec 45 SV450 499 500 225 460 200 eoo Hinode go9FH 2008 iS5 4 Elec 55 SY550 459 500 225 460 200 eoo Hinode go0FH 2008 iS5 4 Elec 75 SY750 200 500 225 460 125 eoo Hinode go0FH 125S S5 4 Elec 193 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Council Directive s to which conformity is declared CD 73 23 EEC and CD 89 336 EEC Units are certified for compliance with EN 61800 3 A11 2000 EN 61000 4 2 A2 2001 EN 61000 4 3 A2 2001 EN 61000 4 4 A2 2001 EN 61000 4 5 A1 2001 EN 61000 4 6 A1 2001 EN 55011 A2 2002 EN 50178 1997 IEC TR 61000 2 1 1990 EN 61000 2 2 2002 EN 61000 2 4 1994 EN 60146 1 1 A1 1997 Type of Equipment Inverter Power Conversion Equipment Model Name SV 85 Series Trade Mark LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd Representative LG International Deutschland GmbH Address Lyoner Strasse 15 Frankfurt am Main 60528 Germany Manufacturer LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd Address 181 Samsung ri Mokchon Eup Chonan Chungnam 330 845 Korea We the undersigned hereby declare that equipment specified above conforms to the Directives and Standards mentioned Place Frankfurt am Main Chonan Chungnam Germany Korea 0 2 225 A q 20 03 06 2021 26 Date Sianature Date Mr Ik Seong Yang Dept Manager Mr Jin Goo Song General Manager Full name Position Full name
100. C reactor Symbols Functions AC Line Voltage Input T 3 Phase 200 230VAC or 380 460 480 VAC G Earth Ground Positive DC Bus Terminal P DB Unit P P Connection Terminals DB Unit may be added when more braking duty More than 30 ED is required External DC Reactor P1 P2 and DB Unit P2 N Connection Terminals N Negative DC Bus Terminal DB Unit N N Connection Terminal m Dynamic Braking Resistor B1 B2 Terminals for 1 30HP inverters 3 Phase Power Output Terminals to Motor W 3 Phase 200 230VAC or 380 460 480 VAC Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10 000 rms symmetrical amperes 240 volts maximum for 230V class models and 480 volts maximum for 460V class models 7 This P terminal is provided on optional Dynamic Braking Unit 8 This N terminal is provided on optional Dynamic Braking Unit Chapter 1 Installation 1 7 1 Type A Configuration As standard on the S5 inverter this type of configuration has internal dynamic braking resistor of 3 ED When an application requires more braking duty an external dynamic braking resistor may be connected instead of the internal resistor Tri Ti tu 3 Phase O Power Input Dynamic Braking Resistor Figure 1 Type A Dynamic Braking Resistor Installation 1 7 2 Type B Configuration A Dynamic Braking Resistor or a Dynamic Braking Unit may be added
101. C30V 1A or less 5 E as eur gupit Fault 30A 30C Closed 30B 30C Open 3 Normal 30B 30C Closed 30A 30C Open Multi Function Output Use After Defining Multi Function Output Terminal AC250V 1A or less AXA AXC Relay DC30V 1A or less Tightening torque of control terminal blocks TER 1 140 Kgf cm 93 5 in Ib TER 2 8 Kgf cm 5 3 in Ib 11 In case of above 30kW it is CM and it has a same electric potential with sequence common terminal CM 19 Chapter 1 Installation 1 8 1 Wiring Control Terminals E Wiring Precautions CM and 5G terminals are insulated to each other Do not connect these terminals with each other and do not connect these terminals to the power ground Terminal 5G is indicated as CM from 30kW inverters and has the same potential as CM Sequence Common Terminal e Use shielded wires or twisted wires for control circuit wiring and separate these wires from the main power circuits and other high voltage circuits e Itis recommended to use the cables of 1 25 mm 22 AWG for connection to the control circuit terminals Control Circuit Terminal e The control input terminal of the control circuit is ON when the circuit is configured to the current flows out of the terminal as shown in the following illustration CM terminal is the common terminal for the contact input signals 24 VDC Current External Sequence Inverter Circuitry A CAUTION Do not apply voltage to any control input t
102. Code FU1 51 through FU1 53 appears only when FU1 50 is set to Yes 59 Chapter 5 Parameter List 5 3 Function 2 Group FU2 7 Segment Keypad Display Setting Range Code Description i 7 Segment Previous Fault History 3 Previous Fault History 4 Previous Fault History 5 FU2 06 Erase Fault History FU2 07 Dwell Frequency FU2 08 Dwell Time FU2 1118 Jump Frequency 1 Low Jump Frequency 1 High Fu2 13 Jump Frequency 2 Low FU2 14 Jump Frequency 2 High Fu2 15 Jump Frequency 3 Low FU2 16 Jump Frequency 3 High 7 Frequency Jump Selection End Curve for S Curve FU2 18 Accel Dedel Pattern Input Output Phase Loss FU2 Protection FU2 20 Power ON Start Selection U2 Restart after Fault Reset Start Curve for S Curve FU2 1 Accel Dedel Pattern FU2 22 Speed Search Selection 19 93 Current Limit Level During Speed Search P Gain 4 During Speed Search 5 Gain During speed search FU2 2 FU2 2 Number of Auto Restart FU2 26 Attempt Delay Time FU2 27 Before Auto Restart FU2 28 Speed Search Hold Time Fu2 30 Rated Motor Selection Jump code Last trip 1 Last trip 2 Last trip 3 Last trip 4 Last trip 5 Erase trips Dwell freq Dwell time Jump freq Jump lo 1 Jump Hi 1 Jump lo 2 Jump Hi 2 Jump lo 3 Jump Hi 3 Start Curve End Curve Trip select Power on run RST restart SS Sup Curr SS P gain SS I gain Retry number Retry Delay SS
103. EV direction Output TRQ EXT 27 A Output TRQ Tig EXT 27 ExT 50 Limit Trq Speed Limit Limit gt gt SPD SPD gt Torque change ae Limit gt pa gt EXT 28 EXT_51 EXT S0 XT_51 au Sheet Speed Speed Speed Bias Bias Bias Limit Bias Output TRQ Output TRQ A EXT 50 EXT 27 Trq Speed Trq Limit Limit Limit SPD SPD gt gt Torque change EXT 28 lt gt EXT 28 Trq Trq lt gt Limit EXT_31 EXT 41 Limit EXTA EXT Speed Bias SpeedBias Speed Bias Speed Bias p 143 Chapter 6 Parameter Description EXT EXT 54 Zero Speed Detection Level EXT 55 Zero Speed Detection Bandwidth EXT 56 Torque Detection Level EXT 57 Torque Detection Bandwidth Used to set the zero speed detection SUB B e Only valid when FU2 39 Control mode selection is set to Vector_SPD Vector_TRQ e Detect the zero speed using 1 0 44 Multi function auxiliary contact output selection Set Zspd Dect in 1 0 44 Multi function auxiliary contact output to activate this function Note Sub board is needed to use multi function output terminal Q1 Q2 Q3 Use to set output torque detection SUB B e Only valid when FU2 39 Control mode selection is set to Vector_SPD Vector_TRQ e Detect Torque using l O 44 Multi function auxiliary contact output selection t Note Sub board should be mounted to use multi function output terminal Q1 Q2 Q3 Code
104. FDT t1 FU1 55 Overload Waring Time bandwidth centered on the FDT frequency AXA AXC configured as OL Related Functions FU1 54 Overload Warning Level Output Frequency FU1 55 Overload Warning Time 10 43 2 ot AXA AXC is CLOSED when the output current is above the 150 of rated inverter current for 36 seconds If this gt Time situation is continued for one minute the inverter will cut off its output and displays IOL Inverter overload Trip 1 0 42 no AXA AXC CLOSED gt Time See the nameplate for the rated inverter current AXA AXC configured as FDT 4 Output Current 150 of Rated j T ate FDT 5 Inverter Current This is the inverted output of FDT 4 Time Output Frequency 150 of Rated h i j ro 4 Inverter Current E ae ree iD ate a tet Se oN a AKAAXC ON gt Time i 1043 2 36sec 24sec gt Time A E AXA AXC configured as IOL AXA AXC ON ON gt gt Time AXA AXC configured as FDT 5 130 Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O Stall OH AXA AXC is CLOSED when the inverter is on the stall AXA AXC is CLOSED when the heat sink of the inverter prevention mode is above the reference level Output Current Lost Command a cero dc das e cn ercer aloes AXA AXC is CLOSED when frequency reference is lost Time Related Functions 1 0 11 Criteria for Analog Signal
105. FU1 77 3 FU1 34 FU1 30 User V F Note When the User V F is selected the torque boost of FU1 26 through FU1 28 is ignored 94 Related Functions FU1 21 Base Frequency FU1 22 Starting Frequency FU1 29 Volts Hz Pattern FU1 38 Output Voltage Adjustment FUI1PVolt control 38 100 0 38 100 Factory Default 100 0 100 This function is used to adjust the output voltage of the inverter This is useful when using a motor with a lower rated voltage than the main input voltage When this is set at 100 inverter outputs its rated voltage Output Voltage A 1 00 Ae r ra When set at 50 50 a A Output gt Frequency A FU1 21 Base Freq Note The inverter output voltage does not exceed the main input voltage even though FU1 38 is set at 110 FU1 39 Energy Save Level FU1 Energy save 39 0 39 0 Factory Default 0 0 This function is used to reduce the output voltage in applications that do not require high torque and current atits steady speed The inverter reduces its output voltage after accelerating to the reference frequency steady speed if the energy save level is set at 20 This function may cause over current trip due to the lack of output torque in a fluctuating load This function does not work with 0 set point value Output Voltage Output Frequency AN Reference Frequency Steady Speed When En
106. Keypad Description Factory Setting Display setting range Code Keypad Parameter Factory Setting Torque Display Name setting range EXT 56 TD Level Detection 100 0 150 Zero Speed Level A E Detection 2 Hz E E Torque Level Hz EXT 57 TD Band Detection 5 0 10 l Zero Speed Bandwidth gal ae Detection 1 Hz 0 5 Hz Bandwidth Auxiliary contact relay activates as shown below if the following settings are applied to EXT 54 Zero Speed EXT 56 Torque Detection Level and EXT 57 Torque Detection Bandwidth are activated in the following conditions as shown below Detection Level and EXT 55 Zero Speed Detection 4 d tia Bandwidth l 71D Bandl i ae EXT 54 SPEED EXT 54 78D 4 ZSD Level i J Level gt AXA Close AXC AXA j AXC Close pee A Related Functions FU2 39 Control mode selection 1 0 44 Multi function auxiliary Related Functions FU2 39 Control mode select 1 0 44 Multi function auxiliary contact output selection contact output 144 6 6 Application Group APP APP 00 Jump to desired code APP gt Jump code 00 1 Factory Default 1 Jumping directly to any parameter code can be accomplished by entering the desired code number This code is available only with LCD keypad APP 01 Application Mode Selection APP App mode 01 None 01 Factory Defaul
107. M Output Operate by Communicating with a Computer 1 0 46 Inverter No 1 0 47 communication Speed 1 0 48 49 Loss of Reference 189 APPENDIX B PARAMETERS BASED ON APPLICATION Application Parameter Code DRV Group When you want to change the frequency setting DRV 00 When you want to change the acceleration and deceleration time of the motor DRV 01 DRV 02 When you want to change the run stop method DRV 03 When you want to change the frequency reference source DRV 04 When you want to set the multi function DRV 005 07 When you want to see the output current motor speed and the DC link voltage of inverter DRV 08 10 When you want to see the output voltage output power output torque from the user display DRV 11 When you want to check the fault of the inverter DRV 12 FU1 Group When you want to use the Jump Code FU1 00 When you want to prevent the motor from rotating at opposite directions FU1 03 When you want to select the acceleration and deceleration pattern suitable for your application FU1 05 06 When you want to change the stopping method FU1 07 When you want to change the stopping accuracy for steady stop FU1 08 11 When DC injection braking is required before starting FU1 12 13 When you want to set the maximum frequency and the base frequency according to the rated torque
108. OF PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHOULD BE LARGER THAN VALUE OF LAKAGE CURRENT AT WORST CASE IN THE BELOW TABLE RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS To conform to the EMC directive it is necessary that these instructions be followed as closely as possible Follow the usual safety procedures when working with electrical equipment All electrical connections to the filter inverter and motor must be made by a qualified electrical technician 1 Check the filter rating label to ensure that the current voltage rating and part number are correct 2 For best results the filter should be fitted as closely as possible to the incoming mains supply of the wiring enclosure usually directly after the enclosures circuit breaker or supply switch 3 The back panel of the wiring cabinet of board should be prepared for the mounting dimensions of the filter Care should be taken to remove any paint etc from the mounting holes and face area of the panel to ensure the best possible earthing of the filter 4 Mount the filter securely 5 Connect the mains supply to the filter terminals marked LINE connect any earth cables to the earth stud provided Connect the filter terminals marked LOAD to the mains input of the inverter using short lengths of appropriate gauge cable 6 Connect the motor and fit the ferrite core output chokes as close to the inverter as possible Armoured or screened cable should be used with the 3 phase conductors only threaded twice through
109. Operation etc 1 0 LED Group Parameters needed for Sequence Operation Sub Board Group EXT LED Displayed when Sub Board is Installed Option Group 1 0 EXT LED _ Displayed when Option Board is Installed Apclieation GiGi FU I O EXT Traverse MMC Multi Motor Control Draw etc PP P LED Application Related Parameters Refer to the function descriptions in chapter 6 for detailed description of each group 23 Chapter 2 Operation 2 2 LCD Keypad LCD keypad can display up to 32 alphanumeric characters and various settings can be checked directly from the display The following is an illustration of the keypad 32 character back light LCD display The back light is adjustable The Program Button is used to go into programming mode to change data The Mode Button moves you through the seven program groups DRV FUN1 FUNZ I O EXT COM and APP The Enter Button is used to enter changed data within a parameter The Up and Down Arrows are used to move through and change data SHIFT This button is used to move cursor across display in programming mode ESC This button is used to move the program code to DRV 00 form any program code Reverse Run Button The Reverse Run LED blinks when the drive Accels or Decels Forward Run Button The Forward Run LED blinks when the drive Accels or Decels
110. P 26 Auto Change Mode Selection APP AutoCh Mode 6 i 26 1 Factory Default 1 1 This function is used to change the running order of the motors to regulate their run time when multiple motors are connected for MMC 0 Not using Auto Change Function The inverter keeps the order Main motor gt RLY1 gt RLY2 RLY3 AUX and do not change the running order of auxiliary motors 1 Auto Change Function is applied only to aux motors The inverter changes the order of auxiliary motors except the main motor connected to the drive Running order is Main Motor gt RLY1 RLY2 gt RLY3 AUX And then it is changed to Main Motor gt RLY2 gt RLY3 gt AUX gt RLY1 2 Auto Change Function is applied to all motors The inverter changes the order of all motors The inverter operates the initial motor and the others are directly powered by commercial line It should be used with Inter lock function after configuring external inter lock sequence circuit as shown below Chapter 6 Parameter Description APP This function is used to protect motor from running alone for a long time by changing operation to other motor 3 Phase Iput Auto Change is accomplished when the following conditions are satisfied 1 The time set in APP 27 is over 2 The actual value of controlling amount is less than the value set in APP 28 3 Only one motor is running When above three conditions are met the inverter stops
111. S63b GMC 50 14 6 8 8 8 8 45A 0 61 mH 38 A 2 18 mH 36 A SV185iS5 4 25 1D125U EBS103b GMC 65 14 6 8 8 14 6 60A 0 45 mH 50 A 1 79 mH 48 A Sv220i85 4 30 TD125U EBS103b GMC 65 22 4 14 6 14 6 70A 0 39 mH 58A 1 54mH 55A SV300iS5 4 40 TD125U EBS203b GMC 100 22 4 22 4 14 6 90 A 0 287mH 80A 1 191mH 76A SV370i85 4 50 S250U EBS203b GMC 125 22 4 22 4 14 6 110A 0 232mH 98A 0 975mH 93A SV450iS5 4 60 TS250U EBS203b GMC 150 38 2 38 2 22 4 140A 0 195mH 118A 0 886mH 112A SV550iS5 4 75 TS250U EBS203b GMC 180 38 2 38 2 22 4 170A 0 157mH 142A 0 753mH 135A SV750iS5 4 100 TS400U EBS403b GMC 220 60 2 0 60 2 0 22 4 230A 0 122mH 196A 0 436mH 187A Note 192 SHORT CIRCUIT FUSE BREAKER MARKING Use Class H or K5 UL Listed Input Fuse and UL Listed Breaker Only See the table below for the Voltage and Current rating of the fuses and the breakers Input Motor External Fuse Breaker Internal Fuse Voltage kW Inverter Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Maker Model A V A V A V l Number 0 75 SV008 10 500 30 220 10 eoo Hinode 66socfF10 iS5 2 Elec 15 SV015 15 500 30 220 15 600 Hinode 66ocf15 iS5 2 Elec 22 5V022 25 500 30 220 20 eoo Hinode 66socF20 iS5 2 Elec 3 7 5V037 40 500 30 220 30 eoo
112. STARVERT iS5 2 000000000 3 000000000 w2 275 10 83 __ 359 6 14 16 261 10 44 A W1 397 14 76 1 330 12 99 al S p Dl H Ej mm inches Frame HP Model Number Wi W2 H1 H2 D1 60 SV450iS5 4 FRIA fez MEE SN SSUSSS ee hae hoa ae nee 100 SV750iS5 4 l l l l l Chapter 1 Installation 1 6 Basic Wiring Ge ae O ESO O O i a gc coe O esti a a cca Braking Unit Optional Main Power DB Unit Optional I i Circuit DB Resist i esistor DC Bus Choke Optional 3 1 DC Bus Choke DB Resistor f I MCCB MC i I 1 cai OPRET P1 P2 ON 1 1 e R L2 U 230 460V S V 1 50 60Hz i ta T w l I i eG i 1 i aoaaa a aa I Forward Run Stop 30 EX Output Frequency Meter A SY 1 i Reverse Run Stop naar 010V Lingan l i Oo O RX 5G l Inverter Disable gt 6 i O O Bx CM I Fault Reset l ault Reset 5 ST I 5 0 JOG Multi function Input 1 1 l o P1 l Multi functionInput2 ____ Factory Setting i i O P2 gt Speed I l Multi functonInput3 Speed M l o P3 W EEEF 1 i Speed H N O 30 A 0 0 O Fault output relay 1 C Terminal H me Ooy soc h eaten aaa a N C 30 B i I I l Potentiometer Shield i j i I Multi function output relay1 l i i Kohm 12W i Power supply for AXA 9O O less than AC250V 1A 1 VR speed signal A less than DC30V 1A i l 12V 10mA c O Factory se
113. Speed L 12 0 arta a Used for Traverse Operation Trv Off Hi 28 Factory Default Speed L 0 Interlock 1 2 ES D Used for MMC operation Interlock3 31 Interlock4 32 1 0 P2 define 13 1 Speed X 33 Additional Step frequency selection 13 Speed M Reset 34 Reset BX 35 Emergency Stop Factory Default Speed M 1 JOG 36 Jog FX 37 Forward Run Stop RX 38 Reverse Run Stop Ana Change 39 Analog input Switch over E ee 14 2 Pre excite 40 _ Pre excitation 14 Speed H Spd Torque 41 Speed Torque Switch over Factory Default Speed H 2 ASR P PI 42 ASR P PI control select Note Refer to DRV 05 7 1 0 20 24 1 0 85 92 for I O 2 33 Speed L Speed M Speed H and Speed X 120 Speed L Speed M Speed H By setting P1 P2 P3 terminals to Speed L Speed M and Speed H respectively inverter can operate at the preset frequency set in DRV 05 DRV 07 and I O 20 0 24 The step frequencies are determined by the combination of P1 P2 and P3 terminals as shown in the following table Step Parameter Speed H Speed M Speed L Frequency Code P3 P2 P1 a DRV 00 0 0 0 op DRV 05 0 0 1 a a DRV 06 0 1 0 Sop Wi DRV 07 0 1 1 step 1 0 21 1 0 0 Step Freq 10 22 1 0 1 5 Siep w 110 23 1 1 0 oe 1 0 24 1 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON t 1 0 20 Jog Frequency can be used as one of the step frequencies t f the Jog terminal is ON inverter operates to Jog frequency re
114. Stall Level FU2 88 FU1 51 2nd ETH tmin ETH 1min ETH level for 1 minute gt FU2 88 FU1 52 j pel Parameter Download 2nd ETH cont _ ETH conf ETH level for continuous ER FU2 90 FU2 33 Mot ted t 3 FU2 Para write 2nd R Curr Rated Curr A 92 Yes e The 1 functions are applied if the multifunction terminal moe is not defined to 2nd Func or if it is not ON The 274 function parameters are applied when the multifunction input terminal set to 2nd Func is ON Parameters not listed on the table above are applied to the 2n4 motor as to the 1st motor 116 Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 FU2 93 Parameter Initialize FU2 94 Parameter Lock FU2 Para init FU2 Para lock 93 NO gt 93 0 94 0 94 0 Factory Default No 0 Factory Default 0 0 This is used to initialize parameters back to the factory This function is used to lock the parameters from being default values Each parameter group can be initialized changed When the parameters are locked the display separately arrow changes from solid to dashed line The lock and unlock code is 12 Setting Range ee LCD 7S Description po E FU2 99 Return Code 7 Segment Keypad No 0 Displayed after initializing parameters All Groups 4 All parameter groups are initialized 99 1 to factory default value DRV 2 Only Drive group is initialized FU1 3
115. Thank you for purchasing LS Variable Frequency Drives SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS To prevent injury and property damage follow these instructions Incorrect operation due to ignoring instructions will cause harm or damage The seriousness of which is indicated by the following symbols This symbol indicates the instant death or AN DANGER serious injury if you don t follow instructions WARNING This symbol indicates the possibility of death or serious injury aS CAUTION This symbol indicates the possibility of injury or damage to property W The meaning of each symbol in this manual and on your equipment is as follows A This is the safety alert symbol Read and follow instructions carefully to avoid dangerous situation AN This symbol alerts the user to the presence of dangerous voltage inside the product that might cause harm or electric shock W After reading this manual keep it in the place that the user always can contact easily W This manual should be given to the person who actually uses the products and is responsible for their maintenance WARNING Do not remove the cover while power is applied or the unit is in operation Otherwise electric shock could occur Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed Otherwise you may get an electric shock due to high voltage terminals or charged Capacitor exposure Do not remove the cover except for periodic inspections or wiri
116. Torque Mode Frequency Torque Setting Method Forward DRV Freq mode 04 0 Rayeise 04 Keypad 1 Factory Default Keypad 1 0 ETN fee Forward Run In Torque mode LCD display Torque mode T 7 Segment 04 ON Reverse Run PAM l gt e If the DRV 04 Frequency or Torque Mode is set to 2 V1 3 1 4 V1 l see the description of I O Drive Mode Fx Rx 11 01 10 Analog Voltage Current input signal adjustment e If FU2 39 is set to 4 Sensorless_T or 6 Output Frequency Vector_TRQ speed is displayed as the percent A Yo to the rated torque Torque command is settable in DRV 04 Frequency or Torque Mode Forward e DRV 04 setting value is separately saved according to which control mode Speed or Torque is a selected in FU2 39 Control mode selection everse DRV gt Cmd Freq DRV gt Cmd Tra A e 00 00 00 Hz 00 0 0 FX CM ON Run Stop A uae Initial screen of Frequency Mode Initial screen of Torque Mode RX CM ON Direction Setting Range Sp Description Drive Mode Fx Rx 2 LCD 7 Seg d Frequency is set at DRV 00 The frequency is changed by pressing PROG Keypad 1 0 key and entered by pressing ENT key The inverter does not output the changed frequency until the ENT key is pressed Frequency is set at DRV 00 Press PROG key and then by pressing the A Keypad 2 1 W key the inverter immediately outputs the changed frequency Pressing the ENT key saves the changed frequency Inpu
117. V2 Adjustment EXT 02 EXT 10 EXT 03 Multi Function Input Terminal P4 P4 P6 Define EXT 30 E EXT 04 EXT31 Multi Function Output Terminal Q1 Q2 Q3 l Define EXT 05 V2 Mode Selection EXT 32 EXT 06 Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal EXT 34 LM Output Adjustment EXT 07 EXT 35 Analog Voltage Input Signal V2 Adjustment EXT 08 156 Chapter 7 Options 7 2 Sub B Board 7 2 1 Board configuration 3P 230 460 La 50 60 HzO Encoder A Signal ls input OC Maximum Select the encoder Reverse Run Stop RX current thru type using Jumper PC 5mA Sub B J1 provided on Emergency stop Not latch Board board Fault reset i Oc Open collector LD Line drive i PR Encoder A ulti Tunction Signal input 1 P1 Factory out LD B Multi function P2 setting Multi input 2 speed input Enesd Multi function P3 Speed L M H a Fea O input 3 is Output LrBB Common Terminal 12 15V DC Input VCC O Encoder GND O signal ground 5V DC input 5V Potentiometer 1 kohm 1 2W VR speed signal 0 Power supply for v1 Speed signal input Apply the 10V 1kohm voltage according to By Speed signal input 30C Encoder 4 20mA 250 ohm 30B External specification Common Power Suppl 5G terminal for AXA Speed signal input 2 VR V1 I
118. When you want to set the operating method when the frequency reference is lost 0 11 When you want to change the functions for the input terminals P1 P2 and P3 0 12 14 When you want to check the status of the input output terminals 0 15 16 When you want to change the response time of the input terminals 110 17 When you want to use the JOG and multi step speed operation 1 0 20 24 When you want to change the 1st 7th acceleration deceleration time 1 0 25 38 When you want to use the FM meter terminal output 1 0 40 41 When you want to set the frequency detection level 110 42 43 When you want to change the functions of the multi function auxiliary contact output AXA AXC 110 44 When you want to exchange the motor to commercial power line from inverter or the opposite 10 44 When you want to use the fault relay 30A 30B 30C functions 110 45 When you want to use RS232 485 communication 1 0 46 47 When you want to set the operating method when the frequency reference is lost 1 0 48 49 When you want to use the auto sequence operation 1 0 50 84 EXT Group When a Sub board and or an option board is installed When you want to define the functions for the input terminals P4 P5 P6 SUB A SUB C EXT 02 04 When you want to use the analog voltage V2 input SUB A SUB C EXT 05 10 When you want to use the encoder pulse for feedback to control the motor speed or use the pulse input for EXT 14 24 frequency reference SUB B When you want t
119. actory Default V F 0 Selects the control mode of the inverter FU2 40 ae setting LCD Display Description 0 VIF V F Control 1 Slip compen Slip compensation Sensorless vector 2 Sensorless_S control speed operation Sensorless vector 3 Sensorless_T control torque operation 4 Vector SPD Vector control speed operation 5 Vector TRQ Vector control torque operation Code LCD Display Description FU2 30 Motor select Select motor capacity FU2 32 Rated Slip Motor rated slip Hz FU2 33 Rated Curr Motor rated current rms FU2 34 Noload Curr Motor no load current rms FU2 36 Efficiency Motor efficiency FU2 37 Inertia rate Motor inertia rate 106 Related Functions Sensorless_S Sensorless vector speed control Vector_SPD Vector control speed operation Use it when 1 high starting torque needed at low speed 2 load fluctuation is high 3 rapid response needed To activate this function set FU2 30 37 and FU2 39 properly If not using LG 220V 440V Class motor Set Yes in FU2 40 Auto tuning first Vector SPD control is Only valid when Sub B board is mounted Speed detecting Encoder installed to the motor FU2 30 37 Motor related parameters FU2 41 44 Motor constant FU2 45 46 P I gain for Sensorless EXT 25 26 P I gain for Vector_SPD EXT 27 28 Torque limit for Vector_SPD Conditions for Sensorless Vector Control Conditions for sensorless control are as follows If one of th
120. alien substance in the cooling fan by detecting the Over Heat temperature of the heat sink The internal electronic thermal of the inverter determines the over heating of the motor If the motor is overloaded the inverter turns off the output The inverter cannot protect the motor when driving a multi pole motor or when driving multiple motors so consider thermal relays or other thermal protective devices for each motor Overload capacity 150 for 1 min External A EXTA Extemal fault a Use this function if the user needs to turn off the output by an extemal fault signal Normal Open Contact External B EXTB Extemal fault B Use this function if the user needs to turn off the output by an extemal fault signal Normal Close Contact The inverter turns off its output if the DC voltage is below the detection level Low Voltage Si E because insufficient torque or over heating of the motor can occurs when the Protection input voltage of the inverter drops Over Current 2 IGBT Short a ivii turns off the output if an IGBT short through or an output short Output Phase The inverter turns off its output when the one or more of the output U V W Phase Open p S phase is open The inverter detects the output current to check the phase open P of the output Used for the emergency stop of the inverter The inverter instantly turns off the BX Protection ee BX BX Instant Cut Off output when the BX terminal is turned ON and returns to regular ope
121. ample 5 Operation condition Control Mode Vector_SPD Control Encoder specification Pulse number 1024 Line Drive type Freq command set 55 Hz via KPD 1 Accel Decel time Accel 15 sec Decel 25 sec Drive mode Run Stop via terminal FX RX Wiring o o B1 B2 3P O oO o R U AC o o o S V Input Soo T w ro G Keypad Encoder E connector Sube AOC gt FX i BOC O gt RX A gt BX A gt RST B 6 _ gt JOG B Y gt P1 FBA O de FBB 4 ie GND GND 5V j e 5V O gt VR VCC O gt Vi VCC C gt 5G Step Parameter setting Code Description FU2 30 Set motor capacity pole number rated voltage current slip and 1 Motor related setting FU2 36 efficiency 2 Encoder related setina Extras Set EXT 12 to Feed back EXT 1 to A B 9 22 Set EXT 16 to 1024 EXT 16 3 Control Mode Selection Fu2 39 Encoder related setting should be done before setting control mode to Vector_SPD Auto tuning starts when set to ALL Read the encoder manual 4 Auto tuning FU2 40 carefully to clear the error if the messages Enc Err Enc Rev are displayed DRV 4 Set DRV 4 to KPD 1 and press the Prog key to set 55 Hz in Drv 5 Keypad input setting DRV 0 0 DRV 2 Accel time set 15 Sec 6 Accel Decel time setting DRy 3 Decel time set 25 Sec 7 Drive mode DRV 3 S
122. and can hinder communication equipment near the inverter To reduce noise install line noise filters on the input side of the inverter Do not use power factor capacitor surge killers or RFI filters on the output side of the inverter Doing so may damage these components Always check whether the LCD and the charge lamp for the power terminal are OFF before wiring terminals The charge capacitor may hold high voltage even after the power is disconnected Use caution to prevent the possibility of personal injury Grounding ra The inverter is a high switching device and leakage current may flow Ground the inverter to avoid electrical shock Use caution to prevent the possibility of personal injury Connect only to the dedicated ground terminal of the inverter Do not use the case or the chassis screw for grounding The protective earth conductor must be the first one in being connected and the last one in being disconnected As a minimum grounding wire should meet the specifications listed below Grounding wire should be as short as possible and should be connected to the ground point as near as possible to the inverter iverne Capacity Grounding wire Sizes AWG mm 200V Class 400VClass Below 3 7kW 5HP 12 3 5 14 2 5 5 7 5kW 7 5 10HP 10 5 5 12 3 5 41 15kW 15 20HP 6 14 8 8 18 5 22kW 25 30HP 4 22 6 14 30 37kW 40 50HP 4 22 6 14 45 75kW 60 100HP 2 38 4 2
123. apacity kW HP ED Continuous Braking Time Braking Torque 100 0 75 1 3 5Sec 200 ohm 100W 15 2 3 5 Sec 100 ohm 100W 200V Cl ds 2 213 2 5 Sec 60 ohm 100W 3 715 2 5 Sec 40 ohm 100W 0 75 1 3 5 Sec 900 ohm 100W 15 2 3 5 Sec 450 ohm 100W 400V Cl ii 2 213 2 5 Sec 300 ohm 100W 3 7 5 2 5 Sec 200 ohm 100W 167 Chapter 7 Options 2 DB Resistor For External Installation Optional DB transistor is integrated for ratings below 7 5kW Install the external DB resistor if necessary However DB transistor is not provided for the ratings above 11kW installing both external DB unit and DB resistor are required See the following table for more details ED 5 Continuous Braking Time 15 sec If Enable duty ED is increased to 10 use the external DB resistor having twice Wattage rating Applied motor Operating rate 100 Braking Torque 150 Braking Torque capacity ED Continuous kW HP Braking Time ohm w Type ohm W Type 0 75 14 5 15 Sec 200 100 TYPE 1 150 150 TYPE 1 1 5 2 5 15 Sec 100 200 TYPE 1 60 300 TYPE 1 2 213 5 15 Sec 60 300 TYPE 1 50 400 TYPE 1 3 715 5 15 Sec 40 500 TYPE 2 33 600 TYPE 2 7 5 5 7 5 5 15 Sec 30 700 TYPE 3 20 800 TYPE 3 i 7 5 110 5 15 Sec 20 1000 TYPE 3 15 1200 TYPE 3 0 11 15 5 15 Sec 15 1400 TYPE 3 10 2400 TYPE 3 Y 15 20 5 15 Sec 11 2000 TYPE 3 8
124. ax Error check CRC 16 Encoding method Menchester Biphase L Station 0 63 Setting via Keypad Dip switch not provided Device Net Field bus lt gt Features Topology Linear Bus Topology Band Method Baseband Protocol DeviceNet Protocol Media Access Method CSMA CD NBA Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detection Nondestructive Bitwise Arbitration Drive link 5 wire Cable Twisted Pair Number of nodes 64 nodes Bus Max Max Data transmission size max 8 bytes 64bits Data rates and Max Cable length thick 125kbps 500m 1640ft 250kbps 250m 820ft 500kbps 100m 328ft lt gt Specification Device type AC Drive Communication control method Explicit Peer to Peer Messaging 2 Master Scanner Predefined M S Connection I O Slave Messaging Polling Connection Baud rate 125kbps 250kbps 500kbps Supply voltage 11 25V Faulted Node Recovery Station 0 63 Setting via Keypad Dip switch not provided Output Assembly Instance 20 21 100 101 vendor specific Input Assembly Instance 70 71 110 111 vendor specific Open Style Connector Interface DPRAM Supports EDS files Refer to communication option manuals for details 163 7 4 3 Chapter 7 Options Performance Specification RS485 amp MODBUS RTU Communication Category Specification Communication Method RS485 RS232 485 Converter Transmission Form Bus method Multi drop Link Sys
125. ay The DRV LED is ON The PROG ENT LED is turned ON I The PROG ENT LED is turned ON The RUN LED starts blinking The RUN LED starts blinking CHAPTER 5 PARAMETER LIST 5 1 Drive Group DRV Command Frequency or Command Torque Output Frequency Ow g E Cmd freq Torque during motor run DRV 0011 or Reference Frequency y Cmd Trq Torque during motor stop Output Current LCD DRV 01 Acceleration Time DRV 02 Deceleration Time DRV 03 DRV 04 Acc time Dec time Drive Mode Run Stop Method Drive mode Frequency Mode or Freq mode Torque Mode or Frequency Torque Torque mode setting Method Step freq 1 Step freq 2 Step freq 3 Current DC link Vtg User disp DRV 11 User Display Selection DRV 12 Fault Display RV 13 Motor Direction Set Not displayed in D play D LCD keypad Tar Out Freq Target Output F RV 14 get Output Frequency Display Reference Feedback DRV 15 2 Frequency Display 313 Ref Fbk Freq Hz Rpm Disp DRV 16 Speed Unit Selection DRV 20 FU1 Group Selection DRV 21 FU2 Group Selection Not displayed in LCD keypad DRV 22 I O Group Selection DRV 2313 EXT Group Selection 7 Segment E 7 Segment 0 to FU1 20 Max freq 0 to 6000 0 to 6000 0 to FU1 20 0 to Max freq Load Current in RMS Motor Speed in rpm A DC Link Voltage inside inverter a Selected in FU2 73 User Disp ma a il tae O Forward 1 rev
126. ays the software version This will vary depending Factory Default RE on software version integrated FU2 81 FU2 90 27d Motor Related Functions FU2 gt Para write 92 No These functions are displayed only when one of the Factory Default No multifunction inputs is set at 2nd func in I O 12 to 1 0 14 When using two motors with an inverter by exchanging This is useful for programming multiple inverters to have them different values can be set for the 274 motor by same parameter settings The LCD keypad can read using the multifunction input terminal upload the parameter settings from the inverter Following table is the 2 4 functions corresponding to the memory and can write download them to other 1 functions inverters This function is only available with LCD keypad 2nd Functions 1st Functions Description FU2 81 DRV 01 Acceleration time 2nd Acc time Acc time FU2 82 DR Deceleration time 2nd Dec time Dec time FU2 gt Para read oe te Base Frequenc 91 Y 2nd BaseFreq Base freq qusay E 3 5 FU2 84 FU1 29 ON Pp 2nd VIF VIF Pattern Volts Hz mode E SE Upload FU2 85 EU let Forward torque boost A z 2nd F boost Fwd Boost Rel Pora Reverse torque boost 2nd R boost Rev Boost Pyaar PATSO Stall prevention level 2nd Stall
127. can control multiple motors This function is often used when controlling the amount and pressure of flow in fans or pumps Built in PI controller controls a main motor after receiving process control value and keeps the control value constant by connecting auxiliary motors to commercial line when needed In case that flow amount or flow pressure is beyond or below the reference so the main drive cannot control by itself auxiliary motors are automatically turned on off Maximum four Q1 3 and Aux output auxiliary motors can be run Each Starting and Stop Frequency should be set to four auxiliary motors Auto Change can be selected to automatically switch the order of the running motors for keeping motor run time constant Set mode 1 for automatic changing of auxiliary motors only and set mode 2 for automatic changing of all motors including main motor For mode 2 external sequence Refer to APP 26 should be configured Chapter 6 Parameter Description APP Abnormal motor can be skipped from running by using the multi function input terminals P1 P2 P3 and P4 If a multi function terminal is opened the inverter stops all running motors and restarts operation with only normal motors except the abnormal motor Refer to APP 29 Sleep function is initiated when flow demand is low Inverter stops motor when the motor runs below Sleep Related Functions Draw This is a kind of Open Loop Tension Cont
128. casscicessesssascesssisssssestaeceansisesiesstssssarssansassstsesscaseancaasstsesteaseansssnsasesseusoansaassasestonsbaaceaessies 52 4 2 Operation using Control TerminalS onononininnnamma rra 53 43 Operation using Keypad and Control Terminals onononononmnnnamars 54 CHAPTER 5 PARAMETER LIST ccosicccssceicees ss Ssacsit libre adidas aciendo diia 56 5 1 Drive Group DR Vlad 56 5 2 F ncti n GTO TAO ii AA A a 58 5 3 Function 2 Group FUZ ceisiniosicisiii msc craneo 60 5 4 Input Output Group VO avi nica id iaa 64 5 5 External COI TEA ini A E E A A E Gai 70 5 6 Communication Group COM 74 5 7 Application Group APP aaa ai 75 5 8 Sub Board Selection Guide According To Function ssssssssssssssssssununnnssnsnunununnnnnonsnnnnnnnnneonnsnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnne 77 CHAPTER 6 PARAMETER DESCRIPTION s sssssssssssssrnsornsnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 79 6 1 Drive Group DRV wins ccoo AA ddr 79 6 2 Function 1 Group FUN sisscssissiicsssstsesccssivssasscascassastuncanostascaceaissnsszsavacsanesussaciscveacsacdunsansatbacaceadestsineivessarcdcsailanisns 87 6 3 Function 2 Group FU2 wiii mica 99 6 4 INpUtOutput Group WO ii tias 118 6 5 External Group EXT lcd adds 136 6 6 Application Group AP O lui dai 145 CHAPTER TS OPTIONS uirrton aa ra aa a 153 7 1 A O 155 7 2 A AAA Az AZ e 157 7 3 Sub C Board Isolated a leerte 161 7 4 Communication option DOArdS cssssssssses
129. chattering noise during O Auditory check No fault Relay operation Is there any damage to the contact O Visual check s there any damage to the resistor O Visual check No fault Digital Multi insulation Error must be Meter Analog Resistor Is the wiring in the resistor damaged open O Disconnect one of the connections within 10 the Tester and measure with a tester displayed resistance Is there any unbalance between each O Measure the voltage between the The voltage Digital Multi 35S phases of the output voltage output terminals U V and W balance between Meter Rectifyi 3 5 the phases for ng Voltmeter Operation Nothing must be wrong with display circuit O Short and open the inverter protective 200V 800V class 2 E Check after executing the sequence protective circuit output is under 4V 8V 8 3 operation The fault circuit a operates according to the sequence Is there any abnormal oscillation or noise O Turn OFF the power and turn the fan Must rotate Is the connection area loose O by hand smoothly Cooling Tighten the connections No fault S Fan Is the displayed value correct olo Check the meter reading at the Check the Voltmeter z exterior of the panel specified and Ammeter etc acl Meter management 2 values All Are there any abnormal vibrations or noise O Auditory sensory visual check No fault 3 Is there any unusual odor O Check for overheat and damage Insulation Megger check between the o
130. ction output relay Less than AC 250V 1A Less than DC 30V 1A Factory setting Run V V l Refer to Parameter list and description for more details 155 Chapter 7 Options 7 1 2 Terminal Configuration 24V DC O 24V a al Ground ne Le 56 ne ar or os en ExTG Nc P4 P5 P6 LM cm 7 1 3 Terminal Description Section Terminal Name Description Used as the extended function of P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 Multi Function Input Contact Input de AN 1 0 12 1 0 14 3 CM Common Terminal Common terminal for P4 P5 P6 Analog VR Power Supply for V2 DC voltage output terminal for V2 12V 10mA Frequency V2 Analog Voltage Input Analog voltage input terminal for frequency reference or override Reference 5G Common Terminal Common terminal for VR and V2 Used to monitor one of Output Frequency Output Current Output 15V Pulse LM Load Meter Voltage DC link Voltage Output 15V Pulse output Average voltage 0 10V DC 5 CM Common Terminal Common terminal for LM Open Collector Q1 Q2 Q3 AIET ae nope Used as the extended function of AXA AXC 1 0 44 Output Open Collector Output E EXTG External Common Terminal Common terminal for Q1 Q2 Q3 NC Not Used 7 1 4 Parameters of Sub A Board Code Parameter Description Code Parameter Description EXT 01 b Board Type Displ EXT 09 01 SUb Barh Type Display Analog Voltage Input Signal
131. cy transient time steady speed time and motor direction These codes are displayed according to the sequence number and steps 135 Chapter 6 Parameter Description EXT 6 5 External Group EXT EXT group appears only when an optional Sub Board is EXT 02 EXT 04 Multi Function Input Terminal Define P4 P5 P6 Sub A Sub C installed EXT 00 Jump to Desired Code EXT Jump code 00 1 Factory Default 1 Jumping directly to any parameter code can be accomplished by entering the desired code number This code is available only with LCD keypad EXT P4 define 02 XCEL L 02 3 Factory Default XCEL L 3 An optional Sub Board is needed if an application requires more than three multi function input terminals Sub A and Sub C boards provide additional three multi function terminals These terminals are used in conjunction with P1 P2 and P3 terminals Refer to I O 12 1 0 14 for use The following table shows the terminal definitions EXT 01 Sub Board Display EXT Sub B D 01 None 01 0 Factory Default None 0 This code automatically displays the kind of Sub Board installed Setting Range LCD 7 Seg Description This board provides three multi function input terminals P4 P5 P6 three multi Sub A 1 function output terminals Q1 Q2 Q3 Load meter output LM and second input frequency reference V2 This board p
132. d 1 Forward By setting speed limit this parameter prevents the motor from rotating excessively high speed due to no load or light load connection during Vector_TRQ in FU2 39 Control mode Set as the percent of EXT 50 Speed limit level and EXT 51 Speed Limit Bias to FU1 20 Max Freq If EXT 53 Speed Limit Direction FWD EXT 51 Speed Limit Bias FWD Torque control is set the FWD Torque control is shown as below In other words when the motor rotates in Forward direction FWD torque is kept controlled in the range of EXT 50 Speed Limit Level EXT 51 Speed bias When the motor rotates in Reverse direction REV torque is controlled in EXT 51 Speed Limit Bias and torque is controlled constant in the above speed range EXT 52 Speed limit gain is the curve value to reduce the FWD torque or to increase to the constant torque in Reverse direction Output torque A DRV 00 A Torque Command l l l gt Speed ExT_51 l l Speed Bias f EXT 51 Speed Bias EXT_50 Speed Limit Related parameters FU2 39 Control mode selection FU1 20 max Freq EXT 27 Trq Limit EXT 28 Trq Limit Chapter 6 Parameter Description EXT The following illustrations show the relationship between torque motor speed and speed limit direction Torque Dir FWD REV limi Speed t FWD R
133. dition for the mounting location Ambient temperature should not be below 14 F 10 C or exceed 104 F 40 C Relative humidity should be less than 90 non condensing Altitude should be below 3 300ft 1 000m e Do not mount the inverter in direct sunlight and isolate it from excessive vibration e Ifthe inverter is going to be installed in an environment with high probability of penetration of dust it must be located inside watertight electrical boxes in order to get the suitable IP degree 1 3 Mounting e The inverter must be mounted vertically with sufficient horizontal and vertical space between adjacent equipment A Over 100mm B Over 50mm However A Over 500mm and B 200mm should be obtained for inverters with 40Hp and above A a gt eel omal gt amal it gt gt a 3 B Mmm B ive Ind A Chapter 1 Installation 1 4 Other Precautions e Do not carry the inverter by the front cover e Do not install the inverter in a location where excessive vibration is present Be cautious when installing on presses or moving equipment e The life span of the inverter is greatly affected by the ambient temperature Install in a location where temperature are within permissible limits 10 40 C e The inverter operates at high temperatures install on a non combustible surface e Do
134. e Manual 24 operation and Manual operation Triggering Sequence operation Go step 25 Auto B Hold step 26 Hold last step Auto A Trv Off Lo 27 Tw Off Hi 28 Used for Traverse Operation Interlock1 29 Interlock2 30 Interlock3 31 Used for MMC operation Interlock4 32 Speed X 33 Additional Step frequency selection Reset 34 Reset Setting Range or LCD 7 Seg Description BX 35 Emergency Stop JOG 36 Jog FX 37 Forward Run Stop RX 38 Reverse Run Stop Ana Change 39 Analog input Switch over Pre excite 40 Pre excitation Spd Torque 41 Speed Torque Switch over ASR P PI 42 _ ASR P PI control select EXT 05 V2 Mode Selection Sub A Sub C EXT gt V2 mode 05 None Factory Default None 0 V2 signal can be used as the frequency reference and override function None V2 signal is not used Override V2 signal override the frequency reference signal V1 V1 l selected in DRV 04 Reference V2 signal is used as the frequency reference At this time the frequency reference selected in DRV 04 is ignored EXT 06 EXT 10 Analog Voltage Input V2 Signal Adjustment Sub A Sub C This is used to adjust the analog voltage input signal when the frequency is referenced or overridden by the V2 control terminal This function is applied when EXT 05 is set to Override or
135. e If this Thermal Sensor apa NTC open message is displayed the thermal sensor wire may be cut Inverter keeps Opened operating Over Speed ES Overspeed Inverter shuts off its output when a motor rotates at the frequency exceeding 20 Hz of its max speed MC Fail MIC Fail Itis displayed when input power is not applied or M C inside the inverter malfunctions To reset fault Press RESET key Close RST CM terminals or connect input power If a problem persists please contact the factory or your local distributor 182 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting amp Maintenance 8 2 Fault Remedy EN Cause Remedy Function 1 Acceleration Deceleration time is too short compared to 1 Increase Accel Decel time the GD of the load 2 Increase inverter capacity Load is larger than the inverter rating 3 Operate after motor has stopped Inverter turns output on when the motor is free running 4 Check output wiring 2 Over Current 3 f 4 Output short or ground fault has occurred 5 Check mechanical brake operation 5 6 Protecti Sonon Mechanical brake of the motor is operating too fast 6 Check cooling fan Components of the main circuit have overheated due Caution Operating inverter prior to correcting fault to a faulty cooling fan may damage the IGBT Protection 2 The insulation of the motor is damaged due to heat 2 Exchange motor 1 Acceleration time is too short compared to the GD of 1 Increase dece
136. e installed and used for the frequency setting and the can be set for each sequence The following table shows run stop command the inverter operation can be the sequence of selection changed to manual operation using this function without changing parameters Sequence Parameter Speed H Speed M Speed L FU1 02 Frequency Mode and FU1 01 Drive Mode are Code P3 P2 P1 applied when the mode has been changed Sequence 1 0 0 1 t Note this function can be used only when the inverter is Sequence 2 0 1 0 1 0 50 stopped Sequence 3 10 84 1 0 0 Sequence 4 0 1 1 Analog hold Sequence 5 1 0 1 When there is an analog input signal for frequency 0 OFF 1 ON reference and Analog hold terminal is ON inverter fixes its output frequency regardless of the frequency reference change The changed frequency reference is applied when the terminal is OFF This function is useful when a system requires constant speed after acceleration Related Functions 1 0 51 1 0 84 Sequence Operation Reference Frequency Output frequency Reference Frequency Jo Output Frequency Note The inverter stops after finishing all steps of that sequence once the Auto Sequence operation is started To stop the inverter during sequence operation use BX terminal on the control terminal strip Manual This is used to exchange the operation mode of inverter from Auto Sequence to manual operation DRV 03 Drive Mode and DRV 0
137. e FM terminal The average ranges from OV to 10V 1 0 41 is used to adjust the FM value 500Hz 2msec fixed FM Output FM CM terminal 1 0 42 FDT Frequency Detection Level 1 0 43 FDT Bandwidth 1 0 FDT freq 42 30 00 FM terminal outputs inverter output frequency The Factory Default 30 00 Hz 30 00 output value is determined by FM Output Voltage Output freq Max freq x 10V x 10 41 100 I O FDT band 43 10 00 Hz 43 10 00 Current Factory Default 10 00 Hz 10 00 FM terminal outputs inverter output current The output value is determined by FM Output Voltage Output current Rated current x 10V x 10 41 150 These functions are used in O 44 Multi function Auxiliary Contact Output See FDT in 1 0 44 Use Sub Boards if you need to use multi function output terminal Q1 Q2 and Q3 Related Functions 1 0 44 Multi function Auxiliary Output Voltage FM terminal outputs inverter output voltage The output value is determined by FM Output Voltage Output voltage Max output voltage x 10V x 10 41 100 DC link vtg FM terminal outputs the DC link voltage of inverter The output value is determined by FM Output Voltage DC link voltage Max DC link voltage x 10V x 10 41 100 Torque FM terminal outputs the Torque of inverter The output value is determined by FM Output Voltage Torque current Rated Torque curre
138. e Select comar Option com 10 COM 10 Device Net ID Device Net COM 11 Communication Speed Device Net Output COM 12 Instance COM 13 Device Net Input Instance PLC Option Station COM 17 Number COM 20 Profibus ID COM 30 Output Number Jump code Opt B D Opt Mode Opt Version D In Mode Digital Ftr Opt TrqLmt Baud Rate Out Instance In Instance Station ID Profi MAC ID Output Num Not displayed Opt CntlMode 7 Segment None Device Net Synchro PLC GF Profibus DP Digital In RS485 Modbus RTU None Command Freq Cmd Freq 8 Bit Bin 8 BCD 1 8 BCD 1Hz 12 Bit Bin 12 BCD 0 1 12 BCD 0 1Hz 12 BCD 1Hz 125 kbps 250 kbps 500 kbps 74 Not available o on OJN Oa A O N gt Adj Factory te Default During Page Run ap ves pii Chapter 5 Parameter List 7 Segment 7 Segment Output 1 oooo srrF HEX ooon Yes Output 2 OmO0S7FF MEX 000 EHEX Yes Output 3 Om0OWS7FF MEX oo0F HEX Yes Output 4 oooo srrr HEX oooo EX Yes Output 5 Om0sS7FF HEX ov00Hex Yes Output 6 ooooseF HEx oooo ExX Yes Output 7 oooos7rF HEx fov00Hex Yes Output 8 oooo srrr HEX foo Yes Input Num ote a1 2 es Keypad Displa Setting Range Facto Ady Code Description JE P Y yu ES De During Page Run 0000 57FFHEX 000 HEX Yes ovoos7FF HEX Jooos Yes 0000 S7FFHEX 0
139. e Selection FU2 39 Set it to 0 V F 2 Drive mode DRV 3 Set it to 0 KeyPad 3 Frequency Mode DRV 4 Set it to 0 KeyPad 1 4 Digital Command DRV 0 Press PROG key on the keypad to set 50 Hz Frequency setting 5 Accel Decel time setting DRV 2 Accel time set DRV 2 to 15 sec DRV 3 Decel time set DRV 3 to 25 sec EXT 12 Set EXT 12 Usage of Pulse Input Signal to 1 Feed back and 6 Sub B board setting EXT 15 set EXT 15 and EXT 16 after checking encoder rating on the EXT 16 nameplate Motor runs at 50 HZ in forward direction with Accel time 15 sec by PG control when pressing FWD key on the keypad Motor E PWD Opefatign decelerates to stop with Decel time 25 sec when pressing Stop key Motor runs at 50 HZ in reverse direction with Accel time 15 sec by PG control when pressing REV key on the keypad Motor Repeat decelerates to stop with Decel time 25 sec when pressing Stop key 47 Chapter 3 Function Setting Operation E Example 3 2nd motor operation Operation condition Control mode V F control 1st motor 2 motor Operation by exchange using 274 Func Values can be set differently Frequency command Using Multi step operation 1st motor 50 Hz as main speed 2nd motor 20 Hz with P1 terminal set as multi step operation Accel Decel time 1st motor Accel time 15 Sec Decel time 25 Sec 2nd motor Accel time 30 Sec Decel time 40 Sec
140. e following conditions is not satisfied the inverter may malfunction with insufficient torque irregular rotation or excessive motor noise It is recommended to use V F control O Use a motor capacity that is equal to or one horsepower lower than the inverter capacity L Two different kinds of motor parameters can be set for one inverter but use only one motor parameter in Sensorless control mode Ol If the motor in use is not LG 220V 440V Class motor or using 220V 380V dual use motor utilize the auto tuning feature in FU2 40 Auto tuning before starting O Set appropriate values for the electronic thermal function the overload limit function and the stall prevention The set values should exceed 150 of the rated motor current O When DRV 04 Frequency Mode is set to V1 P or V1 1 eliminate any potential noise influence with the frequency reference L The number of the motor pole should be 2 pole 4 pole or 6 pole O The distance between the inverter and the motor should not exceed 100m 328 ft Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 Precautions When Using Sensorless Vector Control Ol Forced cooling should be used for the motor when the average operating speed is under 20Hz and more than 100 load is used constantly Ol The motor may rotate 0 5 faster than the maximum speed if the motor temperature does not reach normal operating temperature O Installing the DB Dynamic Brake braking unit option
141. e inverter and fully remove the cover 51 Chapter 4 Quick start procedures 4 1 Operating using keypad LCD Display 1 Apply AC power DRV gt T K 0 0 A 00 STP 0 00Hz 2 LCD Press A key three times DRV Drive mode 7 Seg Rotate the encoder knob until 03 Fx Rx 1 03 is displayed 3 LCD Press PROG key DRV Drive mode 7 Seg Press PROG ENT key 03 Fx Rx 1 4 LCD Press W key one time DRVP Drive mode 7 Seg Rotate the encoder knob left 03 Keypad 5 LCD Press PROG key 7 Seg Press PROG ENT key DRV Drive mode 03 Keypad 6 Press PROG ENT key DRVPK K 0 0 A 00 STP 0 00Hz 7 LCD Press PROG key 7 Seg Press PROG ENT key DRV Cmd freq 00 0 00Hz 8 LCD Press SHIFT ESC key and press A key to increase the command frequency 7 Seg Rotate the encoder knob right to change the command frequency The changing digit moves by pressing the SHIFT ESC key DRV Cmd freq 00 60 00Hz 9 LCD Press ENT key to save the DRVPK K 0 0 A data 00 STP 60 00Hz 7 Seg Press PROG ENT key to save the data 10 LCD Press FWD or REV key to The FWD or REV LED starts blinking start motor 7 Seg Press RUN key to start motor 11 Press STOP RESET key to stop The STOP RESET LED starts blinking motor 52 7 Segment Display Z m NA buf bal M The DRV LED is ON m bt uf The DRV LED is turned ON mm Val af The PROG ENT LED turned ON m
142. e the retry function FU2 26 27 When you want to enter the motor constants FU2 30 37 When you want to reduce noise or leakage current by changing the PWM carrier frequency FU2 39 When you want to change the control method V F slip compensation PID or sensorless operation FU2 40 When you want to use the auto tuning function FU2 41 44 When you want to operate using PID feedback FU2 50 54 When you want to change the reference frequency for acceleration and deceleration FU2 70 190 Application Parameter Code When you want to change the acceleration and deceleration time scale FU2 71 When you want to set the initial keypad display that is displayed when the power is turned ON FU2 72 When you want to set the user defined display FU2 73 When you want to adjust the gain for the motor RPM display FU2 74 When you want to set the dynamic braking DB resistor mode FU2 75 76 When you want to verify the inverter software version FU2 79 When you want to change the connection from one motor to the other motor which use difference parameters FU2 81 90 When you want to copy the inverter parameter to another inverter FU2 91 92 When you want to initialize the parameters FU2 93 When you want to prevent the parameters from being changed FU2 94 1 0 Group When you want to set the analog voltage or current for the frequency reference 1 0 01 10
143. e transmitted from inverter O Use an insulation rectified motor or take measures to suppress the micro surge voltage when driving 400V class motor with inverter A micro surge voltage attributable to wiring constant is generated at motor terminals and may deteriorate insulation and damage motor O Before operating unit and prior to user programming reset user parameters to default settings O Inverter can easily be set to high speed operations Verify capability of motor or machinery prior to operating unit O Stopping torque is not produced when using the DC Break function Install separate equipment when stopping torque is needed 5 Fault prevention precautions O Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails 6 Maintenance inspection and parts replacement O Do not conduct a megger insulation resistance test on the control circuit of the inverter O Refer to Chapter 8 for periodic inspection parts replacement 7 Disposal O Handle the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it 8 General instructions Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter without a circuit breaker a cover or partially open Never run the inverter like this Always place the cover with circuit breakers and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter 9 UL Marking 1 Short Circuit Rating
144. ec 1 0 26 DEC 1 Dec time 1 0 0 1 20 sec The inverter targets the FU2 70 when accelerating or 1 0 27 ACC 2 Acctime2 0 1 0 30sec decelerating When the FU2 70 is set to Maximum VO 28 EE Dec time 2 lt 0 1 Y p30 sec Frequency the acceleration time is the time taken by OA DADES AE S 2 f TE S 1 0 30 DEC 3 Dec time 3 0 1 1 40 sec the motor to reach FU1 20 from 0 Hz The deceleration 10 31 1 acc4 Acctime4 1 0 o 50sec time is the time taken by the motor to reach 0 Hz from 10 32 DEC 4 Dec time 4 1 0 o 50sec FU1 20 Maximum Frequency 0 33 ACC 5 Acctime5 1 0 1 40 sec 1 0 34 DEC 5 Dec time 5 1 0 1 40 sec When the FU2 70 is set to Delta Frequency the 0 35 ACC 6 Acc time 6 1 1 0 30sec acceleration and deceleration time is the time taken to 0 36 DEC 6 Dectime6 1 1 0 30sec reach a targeted frequency instead the maximum 0 37 ACC 7 Acctime7 1 1 1 20sec frequen cy from a frequency 1 0 38 DEC 7 Dec time 7 1 1 1 20 sec The acceleration and deceleration time can be changed FU2 71 Accel Decel time scale to a preset transient time via multi function inputs By setting the multi function inputs P1 P2 P3 to XCEL L Set the Accel Decel time unit XCEL M XCEL H respectively the Accel and Decel time set in 1 0 25 to I O 38 are applied according to the Setting Unit Description binary inputs of the P1 P2 P3 Minimum 0 sec settable Output Frequency 9 are Maximum 60 sec settable A
145. ect the motor Related Functions FU2 33 Rated Motor Current Related Functions FU2 33 Rated Motor Current a Auxiliary Contact utpu FU1 54 Overload Warning Level FU1 56 Overload Trip Selection FU1 55 Overload Warning Time FU1 57 Overload Trip Level FU1 58 Overload Trip Delay Time FUI OL level 54 150 54 150 FU1 OLT select 56 1 hak e Y a Factory Default 150 150 2 gt Factory Default Yes 1 FU OL time 55 10 0 sec 59 10 0 FU1 OLT level 57 180 57 180 Factory Default 10 0 sec 10 0 Factory Default 180 180 The inverter generates an alarm signal when the output current has reached the FU1 54 Overload Warning Level for the FU1 55 Overload Warning Time The FU OLT time 58 60 0 alarm signal persists for the FU1 55 even if the current 58 60 0 sec has become the level below the FU1 54 Factory Default 60 0 ase 60 0 Multi function output terminal AXA AXC is used as the Inverter cuts off its output and displays fault message alarm signal output To output the alarm signal set I O when the output current persists over the FU1 57 44 Multifunction Auxiliary Contact Output to OL Overload Trip Level for the time of FU1 58 Overload Note Inverter is not tripped by this function Trip Time This function protects the inverter and motor Note The set value is the percentage of FU2 33 Rated from abnormal load conditions Motor Current Chapter 6 Parameter Descriptio
146. ed after common parameter settings are done and the followings are set Parameter Name Code Description Starting freq FU1 22 Set frequency to start the motor Torque boost FU1 26 Manual or Auto torque boost settable in this parameter Torque boost value FU1 27 FU1 28 If FU1 26 torque boost is set to manual user sets the desired value and the direction in code FU1 27 and 28 38 Chapter 3 Function Settings 3 VIF PG control If FU2 39 control mode is set to V F with PG encoder feedback using SUB B board the control type is automatically changed to V F PG The following parameters should be set accordingly to enable PG feedback using SUB B board Parameter Name Code Description Usage of Pulse Input Defines the use of pulse input signal with SUB B Signal EAE mounted This parameter should be set to 1 Feed back Pulse Signal Input EXT 15 Three types of input signal settable Selection A B A A B encode ee EXT 16 Defines the number of encoders of the motor Number P Gain for Sub B Gain for Sub B EXT 22 EXT 23 Pl gains for PI controller during PG operation Slip Frequency for Sub B Board EXT 24 Set as a percent of FU2 32 Rated Motor Slip 4 Slip compensation Operation is done via Slip compensation if FU2 39 is set to 1 Slip compen This control keeps motor speed constant regardless of load change 5 Auto tuni
147. efault 0 50 Hz 0 50 Factory Default 2 0 3 2 0 FU1 F limit Hi ik Rex podst 2 FU e 25 60 00 Hz 5 60 00 28 2 0 28 2 0 Factory Default 60 00 Hz 60 00 Factory Default z0 E 2 0 FU1 23 selects the limits for the inverter operating This function is used to increase the starting torque at frequency If FU1 23 is set to Yes inverter operates low speed by increasing the output voltage of the within the upper and lower limit setting The inverter inverter If the boost value is set too high than required it operates at the upper or the lower limit when the may cause the motor flux to saturate causing over frequency reference is outside the frequency limit range current trip Increase the boost value when there is excessive distance between inverter and motor Manual Torque Boost The forward and reverse torque boost is set separately in FU1 27 and FU1 28 Note The torque boost value is the percentage of inverter rated voltage Note When FU1 29 Volts Hz Pattern is set to User V F this function does not work Note When FU2 40 Control Mode is set to Sensorless the torque boost value is the rate per thousand of inverter rated voltage co N Auto Torque Boost Inverter outputs high starting torque by automatic boosting according to the load Note Auto torque boost is only available for the 1st motor Manual torque boost must be used for the 2n4 motor Note The auto torque boost value is added
148. ent techniques Section 5 Surge immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 Testing and measurement techniques Section 6 Immunity to conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 2 Environment Environment description for low frequency conducted disturbances and signalling in public low voltages supply systems Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 2 Environment Compatibility level for low frequency conducted disturbances and signalling in public low voltages supply systems Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 2 Environment Compatibility level in industrial plants for low frequency conducted disturbances Semiconductor converters General requirements and line commutated converters Part 1 1 Specifications of basic requirements 195 EMI RFI POWER LINE FILTERS INTERNATIONAL CAPACITORS RFI FILTERS THE L G RANGE OF POWER LINE FILTERS FF Footprint FE Standard SERIES HAVE BEEN SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED WITH HIGH FREQUENCY LS INVERTERS THE USE L G FILTERS WITH THE INSTALLATION ADVICE OVERLEAF HELP TO ENSURE TROUBLE FREE USE ALONG SIDE SENSITIVE DEVICES AND COMPLIANCE TO CONDUCTED EMISSION AND IMMUNITY STANDARDS TO EN50081 gt EN 61000 6 3 02 and EN 61000 6 1 02 CAUTION IN CASE OF A LEAKAGE CURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES IS USED ON POWER SUPPLY IT MAY BE FAULT AT POWER ON OR OFF IN AVOID THIS CASE THE SENSE CURRENT
149. er Read Writie is executed 6 Protection amp Trip level setting Parameter Name Code Description FU1 50 SIENE Protection of the motor from overheating without the use of l FU1 51 _ Electronic thermal FU 52 external thermal relay Refer to parameter descriptions for FU 53 more detail FU1 54 FU1 55 Overload alarm and trip FU1 56 FU1 57 FU1 58 Warning alarm outputs and displays the trip message when overcurrent above the threshold value keeps on Set the output current level at which the output freq will be adjusted to prevent the motor from stoping due to over current etc it activates during accel constant speed decel to prevent the motor stall Stall prevention FU1 59 FU1 60 7 Starting Accel Decel Stopping pattern setting Parameter Name Code Description 5 types of Accel Decel pattern Linear S curve U Aeee datie FU1 05 curve Minimum Optimum settable according to P FU1 06 appplication and load characteristic If S curve is selected the desired value of FU2 17 FU2 18 is settable 3 types of stopping method Decel DC brake Free run Stopping method FU1 07 selectable If DC brake is selected the desired value of FU1 8 FU1 11 is settable The motor accelerates after the preset FU1 12 for the Starting DC Injection FU1 12 preset FU1 13 is applied Starting DC injection braking is Braking Vo
150. er to Parameter list 159 Chapter 7 Options 2 Sub B board with Open collector type encoder Encoder signal input FWD Run Stop Open collector Maximum current thru PC 5mA REV Run Stop Emergency stop Fault reset JOG Multi function input 1 1 0 12 14 Encoder Multi function Factory setting signal P2 f i input 2 Multi speed input output Multi function p3 Speed L M H input 3 Encoder Common Terminal signal ground 12 15 VDC input output 2 terminal External Potentiometer Power 1 kohm 1 2W Power supply for Supply VR speed signal 12V 10mA Speed signal input 0 10V 1 kohm Speed signal input 4 20mA 2500hm Common for 5G VR V1 1 v1 Note 1 Main circuit Control circuit 2 External speed command V1 I and V1 I Refer to Function list 160 Chapter 7 Options 7 3 Sub C Board Isolated 7 31 Board Configuration 3P 230 460 Y6 50 60 HzO Output freq 2 analog meter 0 10V 1mA Potentiometer FWD Run Stop 1kohm 1 2W Maximum RX current thru REV Run Stop BC EMA 5m Analog meter output 1 0 10V 1mA Analog meter output 2 0 10V 1mA Emergency brake Fault reset JOG Multi function input 1 p4 XCEL L Factory setting Multi speed input Speed L M H Multi function Multi function input 2 P2 input P5 C XCEL M Multi function input 3 P6 XCEL H
151. ergy Save Level is set at 20 Note This function is not recommended for a large load or for an application that need frequent acceleration and deceleration Note This function does not work when Sensorless is selected in FU2 40 Control Mode FU1 50 Electronic Thermal Motor t Selection FU1 51 Electronic Thermal Level for 1 Minute FU1 52 Electronic Thermal Level for Continuous FU1 53 Electronic Thermal Characteristic Motor type selection These functions are to protect the motor from overheating without using additional thermal overload relay Inverter calculates the temperature rising of the motor using several parameters and determines whether or not the motor is overheated Inverter will turn off its output and display a trip message when the electronic thermal feature is activated FU1 ETH select 50 No Factory Default No 0 This function activates the ETH parameters by setting Yes FU ETH 1min 51 180 180 3 180 31 180 Factory Default This is the reference current when the inverter determines the motor has overheated It trips in one Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU1 minute when 150 of rated motor current established in FU2 33 flows for one minute Note The set value is the percentage of FU2 33 Rated Motor Current FUI ETH cont 52 120 52 120 Factory Default 120 120 This is the current at which the motor can run co
152. erminals FX RX P1 P2 P3 JOG BX RST CM 20 Chapter 1 Installation 1 8 2 Keypad Connection Connect keypad to the keypad connector as illustrated below The LCD output will not be displayed on the keypad if the keypad is not connected properly Keypad Connector CN3 DERRIEDE ERE REE E DEERE CEDER REE REE RRE DEERE EERE ELE ELELE Fle Power Supply Input Gate Drive Signal Output Sub Board Connector Connector Socket Sub Board Control Board ETT SA A AA SAA AAA Option Board Connector Option Board aa a aa a aa a a aa a a a ee AO Relay Output Control Terminal Block Terminal Block 21 Chapter 1 Installation Notes 22 CHAPTER2 OPERATION The iS5 series inverter has seven parameter groups separated according to their applications as indicated in the following table The S5 series inverter provides two kinds of keypad One is of 32 character alphanumeric LCD keypad and the other is of 7 Segment LED keypad 2 1 Parameter Groups Parameter LCD Keypad 7 segment Keypad Group Upper left Corner LED is lit Description Drive Group DRV DRV LED Command Frequency Accel Decel Time etc Basic Parameters Function 1 Group UY LED Max Frequency Amount of Torque Boost etc Basic Related Parameters soi Frequency Jumps Max Min Frequency Limit etc Punenon ATOME FUA LEU Basic Application Related Parameters Input Output AS Multi Function Terminal Setting Auto
153. ern Inverter stops with DC injection braking Inverter outputs DC voltage when the Dc brake 1 frequency reached the DC injection braking frequency set in FU1 08 during decelerating i i E gt Time Free run Inverter cuts off its output immediately Coast to stop when the stop signal is commanded Acc Pattern Dec Pattern Accel Decel Pattern Linear output AEN Output Frequency A gt Time Output Voltage A l gt Time Acc Pattern Dec Pattern Time Accel Decel Pattern S curve gt A J Stop Command PXOM ON gt Time Output Frequency x Stop Mode Decel Output Frequency A Time Acc Pattern Dec Pattern FU 1 08 Time Accel Decel Pattern U curve Output Voltage A t1 FU1 09 FU1 07 Stop Mode me t2 FU1 11 FU Stop mode er 07 D cel 07 0 Time E t1 t2 Factory Default Decel A fStop Command FX CM En gt Time Sets the stopping method for the inverter Stop Mode Dc brake 88 Output Frequency A Output Cutoff gt Time Output Voltage A _ Output Cutoff gt Time A Stop Command FX CM EN gt Time Stop Mode Free run FU1 08 DC Injection Braking Frequency FU1 09 DC Injection Braking On delay Time FU1 10 DC Injection Braking Voltage FU1 11 DC Injection Braking Time FUI DcBr
154. ernal fault A External fault has occurred terminal or cause of external fault input Extemal fault B Extemal fault has occurred Eliminate fault at circuit connected to external fault terminal or cause of external fault input E 1 Line voltage low 1 Check line voltage 2 Load larger than line capacity is connected to line 2 Increase line capacity welding machine motor with high starting current 3 Exchange magnetic switch connected to the commercial line 3 Faulty magnetic switch at the input side of the inverter 1 Short has occurred between the upper and lower IGBT 1 Check IGBT Over C t2 2 Short has occurred at the output of the inverter 2 Check output wiring of inverter ECHEN 3 Acceleration Deceleration time is too short compared to 3 Increase acceleration time Low Voltage Protection the GD ofload Faulty contact of magnetic switch at output Open Faulty output wiring 2 Check output wiring Encoder wiring error A and B wiring switched 1 Check for the wiring of inverter and encoder Overspeed Encoder parameter setting is incorrect 2 Check for parameter setting of EXT 14 15 and 16 3 Sub B board or Encoder error 3 Exchange inverter and encoder for a new one HW Fault _ 1 Wdog error CPU fault Exchange inverter 2 EEP error memory fault 183 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting amp Maintenance unction oa eure feck re a Fault a Inverter CPU malfunction gt Exchange inverter Ope
155. erse Not available 0 E Press _ PROG ENT E key Not available 11 The speed unit is changed to when FU2 39 is set to Sensorless_T or Vector_TRQ 12 Code DRV 15 appears only when FU2 47 is set to Yes 13 Code DRV 23 through DRV 24 appears only when a Sub Board or an Option Board is installed 56 Adj Factory ES Default PUring Page Run E 01 200fseo Yes 80 Yes e P wm a rom M None nOn Yes ADA Emon AEA es Chapter 5 Parameter List Keypad Displa Factory Adi Code Description yp pay g g Default anng g Page 7 Segment 7 Segment ENE Yes 57 Chapter 5 Parameter List 5 2 Function 1 Group FU1 Factory Keypad osea Setting Range Code Description 7 Segment 7 Segment Not displayed FU1 00 Jump to Desired Code FU1 03 Run Prevention FU1 05 Acceleration Pattern FU1 06 Deceleration Pattern FU1 07 Stop Mode DC Injection Braking FU1 081 Frequency DC Injection Braking FU1 09 On delay Time DC Injection Braking Voltage DC cis Braking a DC Injection Braking Voltage Starting DC Injection FU1 13 la Time Fut 14 14 Pre excitation Time FU1 15 Hold Time FU1 16 Pre excitation Current FU1 20 Maximum Frequency nal 21 Base Frequency Fut 22 22 Starting Frequency FU1 23 Frequency Limit selection FU1 2415 Low Limit Frequency FU1 25 High Limit Frequency Jump code Run
156. erter turns off its output and displays the fault status in DRV 07 The last 5 faults are saved in FU2 01 through FU2 05 with the operation status at the instance of fault a oc Protech ya Description cD 7 Segment Function Protection more than 200 of the inverter rated current The inverter turns off its output when a ground fault occurs and the ground fault Ground Fault current is more than the internal setting value of the inverter Over current trip Protection function may protect the inverter when a ground fault occurs due to a low ground fault resistance The inverter turns off its output if the DC voltage of the main circuit increases Over voltage higher than the rated value when the motor decelerates or when regenerative protection energy flows back to the inverter due to a regenerative load This fault can also occur due to a surge voltage generated at the power supply system L Over Current 1 Ground Fault Over Voltage Current Limit Protection The inverter turns off its output if the output current of the inverter flows at Overload 180 of the inverter rated current for more than the current limit time S W Protection Over Load The inverter turns off its output by opening the fuse when something is wrong FUSE Fuse Open with the main circuit IGBT to protect the wiring from being damaged from short currents The inverter turns off its output if the heat sink over heats due to a damaged Heat Sink OH cooling fan or an
157. es negative offset during traverse operation by multi function input terminal When the Trv Off Lo terminal is ON the offset frequency is subtracted from the reference frequency To use this function set a terminal out of multi function input terminals P1 P2 P3 to Trv Off Lo in 1 0 12 1 0 14 The offset value is determined by Trv Off Lo Frequency Reference Frequency Trv Off Lo 100 APP 08 Running Auxiliary Motor Number Display APPPAux Mot Run as 08 0 Factory Default 0 Y 4 Chapter 6 Parameter Description APP This code shows how many auxiliary motors are running by MMC control APP 09 Starting Auxiliary Motor Selection APP gt Starting Aux 09 1 09 L Factory Default 1 This code sets the starting auxiliary motor for MMC control APP 10 Operation Time Display on Auto Change APP gt Auto Op Time 10 00 00 10 Factory Default 00 00 00 00 This code displays the operation time after Auto Change is accomplished APP 11 Start Frequency of Aux Motor 1 APP 12 Start Frequency of Aux Motor 2 APP 13 Start Frequency of Aux Motor 3 APP 14 Start Frequency of Aux Motor 4 APPmStart freql 11 49 99 Hz n 49 99 Factory Default 49 99 Hz 49 99 APP gt Start freg2 12 49 99 Hz 12 49 99 Factory Default 49 99 Hz 49 99 APP gt Start freq3 13 49 99 Hz 18 49 99 Factory Default 49 99 Hz 49 99 APPmStart freq4 14 49 9
158. et it to FX RX 1 Motor runs with Accel time 15 Sec at 55 Hz if FX RX terminal is 8 FXIRX terminal uned Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25 Sec if FX RX terminal is turned OFF 50 CHAPTER 4 QUICK START PROCEDURES These Quick Start Up instructions are for those applications where e The user wants to get the S5 inverter started quickly e The factory preset values are suitable for the user application The factory preset values are shown on the Chapter 5 Parameter List The S5 inverter is configured to operate a motor at 60Hz base frequency If the application requires coordinated control with other controllers it is recommended the user become familiar with all parameters and features of the inverter before applying AC power 1 Mounting the inverter mount the inverter as described in 1 3 Mounting e Install in a clean dry location e Allow a sufficient clearance around top and sides of inverter e The ambient temperature should not exceed 40 C 104 F e If two or more inverters are installed in an enclosure add additional cooling 2 Wiring the inverter connect wiring as described in 1 7 Power Terminals AC power should be turned OFF Verify the AC power matches the nameplate voltage Remove the screw on the bottom front cover of the inverter for terminal board access For terminal board access on 15 30HP inverters you must disconnect the keypad cable from th
159. et through the V1 or or V1 terminal DRV 03 Keypad 1 or 2 DRV 04 V1 or or V1 Closing FX or RX terminal performs Run Stop Frequency reference is set through the keypad DRV 03 Fx Rx 1 or 2 DRV 04 Keypad 1 or 2 Operation using Option Board Operation using option board The iS5 has five option boards and three sub boards Option Boards RS485 Device Net F Net ProfiBus and ModBus Sub Boards Sub A Board Sub B Board Sub C Board Please refer to Chapter 7 Options for more information 32 Chapter 2 Operation 2 5 Operating Example 2 5 1 Operation via Control terminal Keypad Setting DRV 03 Drive Mode Run Stop method 1 Fx Rx 1 DRV 04 Frequency Mode Freq setting method 0 Keypad 1 With above setting Freq setting via terminal amp Run Stop via Keypad disabled 1 Check the LCD display when Power ON Otherwise change the setting indicated above DRVPT K 0 0 A 00 STP 0 00Hz 2 Turn the FX or RX terminal ON Then FWD or REV LED will be lit DRVPT K 0 0 A 00 FWD 0 00Hz 3 When setting the Ref Freq to 60 Hz using PROG ENT SHIFT A keys motor will rotate at 60Hz FWD or REV LED will be flickering during Acceleration Deceleration DRV Cmd freq DRV Cmd freq DRVPT K 504A 00 E 0 00Hz 00 a0 00Hz 00 FWD 60 00Hz 4 Turn Fx or Rx terminal Off Then Stop LED will be lit DRVPT K
160. eter Code Displays the code of a group Use the A Up Y Down key to move through 0 99 codes 6 Operating Status Displays the operation information STP Stop Status FWD During Forward operation REV During Reverse operation DCB During DC Braking LOP Loss of Reference from Option Board DPRAM fault LOR Loss of Reference from Option Board Communication network fault LOV Loss of Analog Frequency Reference V1 0 10V LOI Loss of Analog Frequency Reference l 4 20mA LOS Loss of Reference from Sub Board 7 Drive Output Frequency Command Frequency Displays the Output Frequency during run Displays the Command Frequency during stop 25 Chapter 2 Operation 2 2 2 Procedure for Setting Data LCD Keypad 1 Press MODE key until the desired parameter group is displayed 2 Press A or W keys to move to the desired parameter code If you know the desired parameter code you can set the code number of each parameter group in Jump code except DRV group 3 Press PROG key to go into the programming mode the cursor starts blinking 4 Press SHIFT ESC key to move the cursor to the desired digit 5 Press A or W keys to change the data 6 Press ENT key to enter the data The cursor stops blinking NH Note Data cannot be changed when 1 The parameter is not adjustable during the inverter is running Refer to the function table in Chapter 5 or 2 Parameter Lock function is
161. f 10 Close the FX or RX contact to run the The FWD or REV LED starts blinking The RUN LED starts blinking motor 11 Open the FX or RX contact to stop the The STOP RESET LED starts blinking The STOP RESET LED starts blinking motor Chapter 4 Quick start procedures 4 3 Operation using Keypad and Control Terminals 4 3 1 Frequency set by External Source and Run Stop by Keypad 1 Install a potentiometer on terminals V1 VR 5G and connect wiring as shown below left When a 4 to 20mA current source is used as the frequency reference use terminals and 5G as shown below DRV 04 must be set at V1 1kQ 1 2 W DRV 04 must be set at I Pa P2 3 FX RX NC vR wi os eu Jem Bx ast 1 Jem 56 Pa 2 Pa FX RX NC VR vi hos cm Jom Bx rsr 1 FM 56 4 to 20mA signal 2 Apply AC power DRVPT K 0 0 A X HI 00 STP 0 00Hz bat but Da The DRV LED is ON 3 LCD Press A key to move DRV 03 DEV Drive mode m 7 Seg Rotate encoder knob until 03 is 03 Fx Rx 1 mt 3 displayed DRV gt Drive mode mn 4 LCD P PROG key pps Prass die koy 03 Fx Rx 1 bt ut 7 Seg Press PROG ENT key I y The PROG ENT LED is turned ON DRV Drive mode a x 5 LCD Press A key one time 03 Keypad me A MM 7 Seg Rotate encoder knob and set at 0 The PROG ENT LED is turned ON 6 LCD Press ENT key DRV Drive mode mx r 7 Seg Press PROG ENT key 03 Keypad vt al bal The PROG ENT LED is turned OFF 7
162. fault reset set to 1 Yes gt Operation Output Frequency Output Current Output Voltage Frequency Value Setting Operating Keypad Information Speed DC Voltage Output Torque E Trip Information Indicates a Fault when the Protection Function activates Retains Up to 5 Faults __ Ambient Temperature 10 C 40 C 14 F 104 F CE Certification 41 F 104 F 5 C 40 C z Storage Temperature 20 C 65 C 4 F 149 F S Ambient Humidity Less Than 90 RH Max Non Condensing CE Certification 5 85 Non Condensing E Altitude Vibration Below 1 000m or 3 300ft Below 5 9m sec 0 6g Application Site No Corrosive Gas Combustible Gas Oil Mist or Dust Cooling Method Forced Air Cooling CHAPTER1 INSTALLATION 1 1 Inspection e Inspect the inverter for any damage that may have occurred during shipping e Check the nameplate on the inverter Verify the inverter unit is the correct one for the application The numbering system for the inverter is as shown below SV 008 iS5 2 XXX U 480 LS Inverter Motor Capacity Series Name Input Voltage 008 1HP 075 10 HP 2 200 230V 10 50 60Hz 015 2HP 110 15 HP 4 380 460V 10 50 60Hz UL Listed 022 3HP 150 20 HP 4 380 480V 10 50 60Hz 037 5HP 185 25 HP 055 7 5 HP 220 30 HP N Without Keypad O E UL Open Enclosed Type 1 DB Built in DB Unit 1 2 Environmental Conditions e Verify ambient con
163. ference Connecting jumper pin J1 select current input 5G Common Terminal Common terminal for VR and V2 AM1 Analog Meter 1 Used to monitor one of Output Frequency Output Current Output Analog Vilas Voltage DC link Voltage 3 es AM2 Analog Meter 2 0 10V DC analog output 1mA fo GND Common Terminal Common terminal for LM Open Collector Q1 Multi function Output Used as the extended function of AXA AXC 1 0 44 Output EXTG External Common Terminal Common terminal for Q1 NC Not Used 7 3 4 Parameters of Sub C Board Code Parameter Description Code Parameter Description EXT 01 Sub Board Type Display EXT 09 Analog Voltage Input Signal V2 Adjustment EXT 02 EXT 10 EXT 03 Multi Function Input Terminal P4 P4 P6 define EXT 30 Multi function Output Terminal Q1 define EXT 04 EXT 40 EXT 05 ue Moge Selen EXT 41 AM1 AM2 Adjustment EXT 06 Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal EXT 43 EXT 07 EXT 4 EXT 08 Analog Voltage Input Signal V2 Adjustment 2 162 Chapter 7 Options 7 4 Communication option boards 7 4 1 F Net Needed for Communication with LS GLOFA PLC Open network system protocol based on IEC ISA FieldBus lt Specification 7 4 2 Topology Linear Bus Topology Band Method Baseband Protocol Fnet Protocol Media Access Method Token Drive link Fiber optics Number of nodes up to 64 nodes Bus Max Data transmission size 256byte Baud rate 1Mbps Transmission distance 750m M
164. freq 3 Start Frequency of Aux Motor 4 Motor 1 2 Motor 2 i Motor 3 2 Motor 4 CN APP 19 f Operating Aux Motor Delay Time before APP 20 Stopping Aux Motor The Number of Aux Motor E PID Bypass Selection Sleep Delay Time APP 24 Sleep Frequency Wake Up Level Auto Change Mode APP 26 f Selection APP 27 Auto Change Time APP 28 Auto Change Level APP 29 Inter Lock Selection Feedback Freq APP 30 f Percentage Display Actual Value Display APP 33 0 Pressure Display Scale APP 34 Draw Size Setting Start freq 4 Stop freq 1 Stop freq 2 Stop freq 3 Stop freq 4 Aux start DT Aux stop DT Nbr Aux s Regul Bypass Sleep Delay Sleep Freq AutoEx intv AutoEx level Inter lock Fbk PER Scale Disp Draw Mode Draw Mode Selection DrawPerc e 7 Segment Auto Op Time WakeUp Level e AutoCh Mode 76 E 7 Segment 0 to FU1 20 49 99 Hz 0 01 49 99 Hz 0 to FU1 20 0 to FU1 20 0 to FU1 20 49 99 Hz 15 00 Hz 0 to FU1 20 0 to FU1 20 0 01 15 00 Hz 0 01 15 00 Hz 0 01 15 00 Hz 0 1 60 0 sec 0 to FU1 20 0 to FU1 20 0 to 9999 sec 0 to 9999 sec 0to4 af 4 Yes 148 0 1 60 0 sec 4 Yes Adj Factory E Default Page Run 147 147 0 01 49 99 Hz 148 a No Yes 148 0 to 9999 sec 60 0 sec 0 to FU1 20 0 19 Hz 0 to 100 35 0 Y 00 00 to 99 00 00 01 72 00 No 150 0 to 100 201
165. gardless of other terminal inputs 121 Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O Output Frequency A Step E Step E Step Step Step Step Step Bie ir Jog gt Time A0 1 AA A P1 cM ON ON ON ON RE a ee ee LaS P2 CM ON ON A k E ENE gt Time P3 CM ON i gt Time JOG CM ON gt Time FX CM ON E gt Time P RX CM ON gt Time Multi Step Frequency Operation Related Functions DRV 05 DRV 07 Step Frequency 1 0 20 Jog Frequency 1 0 20 1 0 24 Step Frequency Note The frequency for Speed 0 is determined by DRV 04 Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O XCEL L XCEL M XCEL H By setting P1 P2 and P3 terminals to XCEL L XCEL M and XCEL H respectively up to 8 different Accel and Decel times can be used The Accel Decel time is set in DRV 01 DRV 02 and 1 0 25 1 0 38 The Accel Decel time is determined by the combination of P1 P2 and P3 terminals as shown in the following table Accel Decel Parameter XCEL H XCEL M XCEL L Time Code P3 P2 P1 Accel Time 0 DRV 01 0 0 0 Decel Time 0 DRV 02 Accel Time 1 1 0 25 0 0 i Decel Time 1 1 0 26 Accel Time 2 1 0 27 0 j 0 Decel Time 2 1 0 28 Accel Time 3 1 0 29 0 1 1 Decel Time 3 1 0 30 Accel Time 4 1 0 31 i 0 0 Decel Time 4 1
166. ge 7 Segment 7 Segment Run Fault Output Relay 1 0 45 Relay mode Setting 30A 30B 30C 110 4625 Inverter Number 110 47 Baud Rate Baud rate Operating selection at Lost command Loss of Freq Reference Waiting Time after Loss 1 0 49 Time out of Freq Reference Auto Sequence 10 50 f Auto mode Operation selection S Numb 1 0 51 vices ee Seq select Selection The Number of St f 1 0 52 ds Step number Sequence Number 1st Step Frequency of 110 5327 Seqi 1F Sequence 1 Transient Time to 1 Step 110 54 Seq1 1T of Sequence 1 Steady Speed Time at 1 110 55 Seq1 1S Step of Sequence 1 Motor Direction of 1st 1 0 56 Seq1 1D Step of Sequence 1 1st Step Frequency of 1 0 Seq1 2F Sequence 2 57 Transient Time to 1s Step 1 0 58 Seq1 2T of Sequence 2 Steady Speed Time at 1 Seq1 2S Step of Sequence 2 1 0 59 Motor Direction of 1s 1 0 60 Seq1 2D Step of Sequence 2 1 0 85 Step Frequency 8 Step freq 8 1 0 86 Step Frequency 9 Step freq 9 1 0 87 Step Frequency 10 Step freq 10 1 0 88 Step Frequency 11 Step freq 11 110 89 Step Frequency 12 Step freq 12 LCD 000 to 111 010 Yes 133 Bit Set 10 31 Yes 1200bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Yes 133 9600 bps 19200 bps None Yes 133 1 0 sec Yes 1 1 Yes 2 Yes 11 00 Hz None FreeRun Stop 0 1 to 120 sec 0 1 2 Q E Reverse Forward Yes Forward 0 01 to FU1 20 21 00 Hz 0 1 to
167. group by pressing SHIFT ESC key in any parameter code DRV FUI FU2 1 0 EXT 0 00 O O QQ a O LI LI LI DRV FU1 FU2 0 EXT e 0 0 O O ow inn o 1 LLI LI DRV FU1 FU2 1 0 EXT e o O 0 O m anno o E E UL A Encoder Knob PROG Y ORY l Fue 1 0 ExT DRV FUI FU2 10 EXT pi a Fue 1 0 ExT Prog O 0O O 9 T op 1 loa O U l uot l 0D Y l DRV FUI FU2 1 0 EXT DRV FU1 FU2 1 0 EXT DRV FUI FU2 1 0 EXT e 0 0 O mol O O 0 O O 0 8 0 0 Jea mi ag j l i Dl 99 DRV FUI FU2 1 0 EXT DRV FUI FU2 1 0 EXT DRV FUT FU2 1 0 EXT e 0 0 0 O mwl O O O O OOO e o Olen 1 1 111 E IA O O i 0 0 LLI JIJ 31 Chapter 2 Operation 2 4 Operation Method The iS5 has several operation methods as shown below Operation Method Function Function Setting Operation using Keypad Run Stop command and frequency are set only through the keypad DRV 03 Keypad DRV 04 Keypad 1 or 2 Operation using Control Terminals Closing FX or RX terminal performs Run Stop Frequency reference is set through V1 or or V1 I terminal DRV 03 Fx Rx 1 or 2 DRV 04 V1 or or V1 l Operation using both Keypad and Control Terminals Run Stop is performed by the keypad Frequency reference is s
168. h Interlock4 automatically APP gt AutoEx intv 21 72 00 27 72 00 Note P1 through P4 cannot be used for other purpose it Factory Default 72 00 72 00 this code is set to Yes Related Functions 1 0 12 to I O 14 Multi Function Input APPR AutoEx level 28 20 EXT 02 to EXT 04 Multi Function Input 28 20 Factory Default 20 20 150 Chapter 6 Parameter Description APP operation For example when Reference Frequency APP 30 Feedback Freq Percentage Display DRV 00 is set to 30Hz Draw Mode APP 33 to V1_Draw and Draw Size APP 33 to 10 the APP Fbk PER 30 0 00 frequency difference during Draw operation is between 30 Hz E 27 Hz and 33Hz The following figure shows the block Factory Default E 0 00 diagram for Draw and Override operation This code displays the feedback value using on PID controller in Hz or APP 31 Actual Value Display in Percentage APPP Prs 31 Bar Pa 31 0 Factory Default This code displays the value using on PID controller in percentage APP 32 Pressure Display Scale APP gt Scale Disp ap 1008 32 1000 Factory Default 1000 1000 This parameter adjusts APP 31 APP 33 Draw Mode Selection APP Draw Mode 33 None Factory Default None 0 This code sets the signal input to use for Draw operation The main reference frequency is set in DRV 04 Th
169. hanged 9 April 2003 Sub D board excluded 2 01 Sub D not available Declaration of Conformity CE models units ranging from 30kW to 75kW las ci DOC 2 01 added to DOC 1 Page 178 Group 3 DBU dimension revised 2 Page 192 195 DOC revised 3 Page 138 EXT 12 description revised 4 Page 122 Exchange diagram AXB gt AXC revised eh Sees 2 01 5 page 131 132 CLOED gt CLOSED 6 Page 149 APP 24 7 segment display 23 gt 24 7 Page 153 DB Unit 15 30HP gt 15 100HP 8 Page 181 MC Fail and Over speed protection added 1 UL Marking added 12 April 2004 S W Update 2 11 2 Fuse and breakers specification added 3 Power Control Terminal specification revised 1 Built in DBU models included 13 Feb 2005 2 11 2 Over speed amp M C fail added 3 Power Terminal explanation changed 14 June 2005 2 11 Cl changed 15 Nov 2005 S W Update 2 12 16 Nov 2006 S W Update 2 13 1 Wire and terminal lugs specification changed 199
170. her moving equipment U curve This pattern provides more efficient control of acceleration and deceleration in typical winding machine applications Minimum The inverter makes shorten the acceleration time by accelerating with a current rate of about 150 of its rated current and reduces the deceleration time by decelerating with a DC voltage rate of 95 of its over voltage trip level Appropriate application When the maximum capability of the inverter and the motor are required Inappropriate application The current limit function may operate for a long period of time for loads that have high inertia such as fans Optimum The inverter accelerates with a current rate of about 120 of its rated current and decelerates with a DC voltage rate of 93 of its over voltage trip level Note In case of selecting the Minimum or Optimum the DRV 01 and DRV 02 is ignored Note Minimum and Optimum functions operate normally when the load inertia is less than 10 times compared to the motor inertia FU2 37 Note Optimum is useful when the motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity Note Minimum and Optimum functions are not appropriate for down operation in an elevator application Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU1 Output Frequency Setting Range Describt A LCD 7 Seg escription Decel 0 Inverter stops by the deceleration patt
171. hermometer Ambient Is the ambient temperature and humidity 10 40 no Environ adequate 0 freezing Hygrometer ment Humidity Under Recorder Al 50 no dew Equipment Is there any abnormal oscillation or noise 0 Use sight and hearing No abnormality Input Is the input voltage of the main circuit o Measure the voltage between the Digital Multi Voltage normal terminals R S T Meter Tester Megger check between the main circuit and O Undo the inverter connections short Over 5MQ DC 500V the ground the terminals R S T U V W and No fault class Megger Al Are any fixed parts removed O O measure between these parts and the Are there any traces of overheating at each O ground component s cleaning Tighten the screws Visual check Conductor Is the conductor rusty O Visual check No fault Wire Is the wire coating damaged O Terminal Is there any damage 0 Visual check No fault IGBT Check the resistance between each of the O Undo the inverter connection and Refer How to Digital Multi 35 Module terminals measure the resistance between R S Check Power Meter Analog Diode T lt P NandU V W gt P Nwitha Components Tester Module tester s there any liquid coming out O Visual check No fault Capacitance Smoothing Is the safety pin out and is there any O Measure with a capacitance Over 85 of the Measuring Capacitor swelling measuring device rated capacity Device easure the capacitance O s there any
172. his is selected when there is no resistor z z None 0 connected At this time inverter does not FU2 73 User display selection generate DB tum on signal This is selected when using the internal Related Function DRV 11 User display selection DB resistor This must be selected for Int DB R 4 1 5 HP inverters because they have Select the display as shown below in FU2 73 User internal DB resistor as a default Enable Duty 2 3 apa secon Continuous Turn On Time 5 seconds This is selected when using an external Setting FU2 73 Name Description DB resistor This must be selected for Display output voltage of 1 30 HP inverters This must be selected Output i 0 Voltage voltage the inverter Factory Ext DB R 2 for 1 5 HP inverters in case of using an setting external DB resistor 1 Watt Output Display output power of the Enable Duty 0 30 power inverter Continuous Turn On Time 15 seconds t Note The displayed vlaue of Watt is approximate value FU2 74 Gain for Motor Speed Display FU2P RPM factor 74 100 14 100 Factory Default 100 100 This code is used to change the motor speed display to rotating speed r min or mechanical speed m min The display is calculated by following equation Rotating speed 120 x F P where F Output frequency P motor pole number Mechanical speed Rotating speed x Motor RPM Display Gain e The inverter turn
173. igma Stator resistance Rs Leakage inductance Lsigma is calculated 3 User should set the Stator inductance Ls No load current Noload Curr Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 FU2 40 LCD display Description Keypad error display after Encoder test 0 No Auto tuning disabled Display 0 ono all cos LED 7 Segment Descipuon 1 All parameters Enc Err T6 Displayed when incorrect Stator resistance Rs FU2 Encoder wiring error occurs 2 Rs Lsigma and Leakage inductance 40 T7 Displayed when Encoder Enc Rev NS Lsigma Auto tuning wiring is connected reversly 3 Enc Test PG status check 4 Tr Rotor constant Tr calculation Motor parameter display corresponding to inverter capacity Note 1 Ls and Noload Curr are only valid during Motor Class inverter Motor parameter Rotation mode capacity Rs Lsigma Ls Tr Note 2 The motor constants values change with 0 8 kW X XXX XXX XXX XXX temperature change so auto tuning is to be conducted 200V 5 5 kW ohm mH mH ms after the temperature of the motor is stabilized 7 5 KW 55 kW X X X XXX XXX XXX Note 3 The auto tuning result could be different unless i mohm mH mH ms LG motor is used 0 8 kW XXX yy mH x mH X t Note 4 The actual motor parameters Rs Rr Lsigma 1 5 kW ohm ms Tr can be used or set by user 400V
174. in During Speed Search FU2 RST restart 21 0 Zt N0 FU2 gt Speed Search 20 none 22 0000 Factory Default No 0 Factory Default 0000 0000 If FU2 21 is set to Yes inverter will restart after the RST reset terminal has been reset a fault If FU2 21 is set to No restart the inverter by cycling the FU2 gt SS Sup Curr 23 150 FX or RX terminal to CM terminal after the fault has 23 150 5 been reset If the motor is rotating by inertia at the time Factory Default 150 2 150 power is restored the inverter may trip To avoid this trip use Speed Search function by setting FU2 22 to xx1x 10 N Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 FU2P SS P gain i iot 24 100 Input one gt Time Motor Speed A Factory Default 100 100 FU2P SS 25 200 Factory Default 200 This function is used to permit automatic restarting after Power ON Fault Reset and Instant Power Failure pa without waiting for the motor to stop Output el The speed search gain should be set after considering the inertia moment GD and magnitude of torque of the load FU2 37 Load Inertia must be set at the correct value to make this function operate correctly gt Time FU2 22 Speed Search Select Output Voltage Setting Range de 4 bit Sra bit 2 bit 15t bit Dest eect 0 0 0 0 Speed search function does not work 0 0 0 1 Speed search during Accelerating
175. in when the speed and torque response is Factory Default slow Related Functions FU1 54 Overload Warning Level EXT 26 Sensored Vector_SPD FU1 55 Overload Warning Time FU1 59 Stall Prevention Mode EXTP ASR I Gain FU1 60 Stall Prevention Level 26 200ms 26 200 1 0 12 1 0 14 Multi function Input Terminal define Default 2 2 1 0 42 1 0 43 Frequency Detection dl ae s 1 0 44 Multi function Auxiliary Contact This is the integral gain when the control mode is set to Output define Sensored eee Sn 1 0 50 1 0 56 Auto Operation Adjust the gain when the speed and torque response is slow EXT 34 LM Load Meter Output Sub A EXT 35 LM Adjustment EXT LM mode 34 Current 34 1 Factory Default Current 1 EXT LM Adjust 39 100 35 100 Factory Default 100 Load meter displays the inverter output Frequency Current Voltage and DC link voltage with pulse signals on the LM terminal of Sub A board The average ranges from OV to 10V EXT 35 is used to adjust the LM value Frequency LM terminal outputs inverter output frequency The output value is determined by LM Output Voltage Output freq Max freq x 10V x FM output gain 1 0 41 100 Current LM terminal outputs inverter output current The output value is determined by LM Output Voltage Output current Rated current x 10V x X FM output gain 1 0 41 150 Voltage LM terminal outp
176. in_ ExT23 GainforPG Option PGigan _ ExT 24 Slip Frequency forPG Option PGSlipfreg_ EXT 30 Multi function Output Teina Q Qtdefine EXT 31 Multi function Output Terminal 02 Q2define ExT 32 Multi function Output Teina Q3 Q3define ExT 41 AM1 Output Adjustment AMfadust AM2 Analog Meter 2 Output Selection AM2mode ExT 43 AM2 Output Adjustment AMZadust e EXT 50 Speed LimitLevel Speedlimit EXT 51 Speed LimitBias SpeedBias EXT 52 Speed Limit Gain SpeedGain_ EXT 53 Speed Limit Direction SpeedDir EXT 54 Zero Speed Detection Level ZSDlevel EXT 55 Zero Speed Detection Bandwidth ZSDBand_ EXT 56 Torque Detection Leve TDleva EXT 57 Torque Detection Bandwith TDBand 77 Chapter 5 Parameter List Notes 78 CHAPTER 6 PARAMETER DESCRIPTION 6 1 Drive group DRV DRV 00 Command Frequency or Command Torque Output Current LCD DRV Cmd Freq A 00 0 00 Hz F 0 00 Factory Default 0 00 Hz 0 00 In Torque mode LCD display Cmd Trq 7 Segment r Rpm e In FU2 39 Control Mode Selection 4 Sensorless_T 6 Vector_TRQ is torque mode e DRV 00 Command Frequency or Command Torque has two functions 1 Digital frequency setting When DRV 04 Frequency or Torque M
177. ing Page 7 Segment 7 Segment Run BX FX RX Ana Change Pre excite Spd Trq ASR PPI Multi Function Input X 7 P5 define Ye Terminal P5 Define Same as Above Multi Function Input f X P6 define Ye Terminal P6 Define None XT 05 V2 Mode Selection Override No Reference E E E Filtering Time Constant E f V2 filter 0 to 9999 ms for V2 Input Signal E E 1 0 01 0 00 M Frequency XT 08 Corresponding to V2 V2 freq y1 0 to FU1 20 Input Minimum Voltage V2 Input Maximum EXT 09 V2 volt x2 V2 volt x1 to 10 V 0 01 10 00 V Ye Voltage Frequency EXT 10 Corresponding to V2 V2 freq y2 0 to FU1 20 0 01 60 00 Hz Yes Input Maximum Voltage None Usage of Pulse Input EXT 12 Feed back 1 Signal Reference a Reverse EXT 13 Real Speed Direction RealSpdDir Forward Encoder Feedback EX Frequency Pulse Input Signal EXT 15 f F pulse set Selection A B 2 EXT 16 Encoder Pulse Number F pulse num 10 to 4096 1024 Filtering Time Constant EX f F filter 0 to 9999 ms 1 10 ms Yes 139 for Pulse Input Signal Pulse Input Minimum EX F pulse x1 0 to 10 kHz 0 01 0 00 kHz Yes 139 Frequency i S S S S S S 136 137 137 38 T 03 T 04 XT 06 V2 Input Minimum XT 07 V2 volt x1 0 to V2 volt x2 V Voltage T 14 T 17 T 18 71 Chapter 5 Parameter List Keypad Displa Factory Ad 7 Segment ts Frequency Output Corresponding to Pulse E ini
178. inverters utilize optional braking resistors 460 480 V Class 1 30HP Model Number SV xxx iS5 4 008 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220 Motor HP 1 2 3 5 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 Rating kW 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 Capacity kVA 1 9 3 0 45 6 1 9 1 12 2 18 3 22 9 29 7 34 3 Output FLA A 2 5 4 6 8 12 16 24 30 39 45 Ratings Frequency 0 400 Hz Sensorless Vector Control 0 300Hz Sensored Vector Control 0 120 Hz Voltage 380 460 V 380 480 V 3 Input Voltage 3 Phase 380 460 V 10 380 480 V 10 Special type available from 2004 5 Ratings Frequency 50 60 Hz 5 ale aca On Board On Board i nee Optional DB Resistor Dynamic oe 100 100 100 Braking 20 Max Continuous aie 5 seconds 5 seconds Continuous 15 seconds Baking Time Max Duty 3 ED 2 ED 10 ED Weight kg 47 47 48 49 7 7 77 13 9 14 4 20 20 460 480 V Class 40 100HP Model Number SV xxx iS5 4 300 370 450 550 750 Motor HP 40 50 60 75 100 Rating kW 30 37 45 55 75 Capacity kVA 45 56 68 82 100 Output FLA A 61 75 91 110 152 Ratings Frequency 0 400 Hz Sensorless Vector Control 0 300Hz Sensored Vector Control 0 120 Hz Voltage 380 460 V 380 480 V 3 Input Voltage 3 Phase 380 460 V 10 380 480 V 10 Special type available from
179. is parameter should be set to a signal that is not selected in DRV 04 APP 34 Draw Size Setting APP Draw Perc 34 100 34 100 Factory Default 100 100 This code sets the frequency bandwidth during Draw Chapter 6 Parameter Description APP Control LPF Terminal Gain Bias Control LPF E OA Gain Bias Termianl ORDI F Draw amp Override Reference Frequency Frequency Mode Miti Step Cons Frequency r SUB A LT y or SUB C LPF Gain Bias Vad rl None Limit Override_Freq A e Ma jaen 5 a Draw_Freq lo a Ed Max Frequency DrawPerc Draw Mode Code LCD Display Description Factory Default Setting Range 0 None APP 33 Draw Mode Draw Mode Select 0 None ADT 2 1_ Draw 3 V2_Draw APP 34 DrawPerc Draw Size Setting 100 0 0 0 150 0 Note 1 APP 33 Setting Guide Ref Frequency setting mode should not be duplicated Ref Freq Setting DRV 04 V1 APP 33 Draw Mode 1 V1_Draw X Ref Freq Setting DRV 04 V1 APP 33 Draw Mode 2 _Draw O 2 APP 34 sets the freq limit scale during Draw Mode Ex If Ref freq Keypad 1 30Hz APP 33 1 V1_Draw APP 34 10 the ref freq for Draw mode will be issued from 27Hz to 33Hz 152 CHAPTER 7 OPTIONS
180. is not grounded 1 7 5 Wiring Power Terminals Wiring Precautions An The internal circuits of the inverter will be damaged if the incoming power is connected and applied to output terminals U V W Use ring terminals with insulated caps when wiring the input power and motor wiring Do not leave wire fragments inside the inverter Wire fragments can cause faults breakdowns and malfunctions For input and output use wires with sufficient size to ensure voltage drop of less than 2 Motor torque may drop of operating at low frequencies and a long wire run between inverter and motor When more than one motor is connected to one inverter total wire length should be less than 200m 656ft Do not use a 3 wire cable for long distances Due to increased leakage capacitance between wires over current protective feature may operate or equipment connected to the output side may malfunction But for products of less than 3 7kW the wire length should be less than 50m 146ft In case of long wire length it should be required to lower carrier frequency or use Micro Surge Filter Length between Inverter and Motor Up to 50m Up to 100m More than 100m Allowable Carrier Frequency Less than 15kHz Less than 5kHz Less than 2 5kHz Connect only recommended braking resistor between the B1 and B2 terminals Never short B1 and B2 terminals Shorting terminals may cause internal damage to inverter The main circuit of the inverter contains high frequency noise
181. istor P1 is ON TH1 TH2 Shorted at normal ambient temp and P1 is OFF TH1 TH2 Open at overheated status Connect the thermal sensor to one of the multi function input P1 P2 or P3 I O 12 14 setting Ext Trip B TH1 TH2 169 Chapter 7 Options e DB resistor wiring for 7 5 10HP Inverter Fault reset Jog O TH1 TH2 B1 B2 DB Resistor Max distance between inverter and DB Resistor 5m Analog freq output 2 Max Current thru Multi function input terminal O 12 Setting Ext Trip B DB resistor terminal Terminal description B1 B2 Connect the DB Resistor to Inverter terminal B1 B2 Thermal sensors provided with the DB resistor THI TH2 P1 is ON TH1 TH2 Shorted at normal ambient temp and P1 is OFF TH1 TH2 Open at overheated status Connect the thermal sensor to one of the multi function input P1 P2 or P3 I O 12 14 setting Ext Trip B 170 Chapter 7 Options eDB resistor wiring for 15 30HP Built in DB Unit Inverter a DB Resistor B1 B2 Max distance between inverter and DB Resistor 5m Analog freq output 2 0 10V WD Run Stop Max Current thru REV Run Stop PC EmA BX Fault reset RST Jog JOG P1 Multi function input terminal P2 1 0 12 Setting Ext Trip B P3 CM DB resistor terminal Terminal description B1 B2 Connect the DB Resistor to Inverter terminal B1 B2 Thermal sens
182. l input 0 10V 1 Speed signal input 4 20mA 2500hm Common for VR V1 1 5G Speed signal pue Wiring to By Pass Motor to Commercial line DR nt et gt Time i FX CM ON gt Time Exchange CM ON gt Time AXA AXC o i a E ON E COMM line gt Time INV line ON ON cor ON wm gt Time e Inverter Commercial Inverter Drive Line Drive Drive t1 t2 50msec interlock time Exchanging Sequence Up Down By using the Up and Down function the drive can accelerate to a steady speed and decelerate down to a desired speed by using only two input terminals Output Frequency A O ici ass Max gt Time P1 CM E Up gt Time P2 CM i Down ON gt Time FX CM ON gt Time Up Down Operation 123 Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O 3 Wire This function is for 3 wire start stop control This function is mainly used with a momentary push button to hold the current frequency output during acceleration or deceleration FX RX P2 CM Wiring for 3 Wire Operation P2 set to 3 Wire Output Frequency Freq Max TLL en gt Time P2 CM ON a i gt Time FX CM ON gt gt Time RX CM ON gt Time 3 Wire Operation Ext Trip A This is a normally open
183. lay Over Current 1 Over cds oc Over Voltage Over Voltage OV Extemal Trip Input A External A EXTA Emergency Stop Not Latched BX BX Low Voltage Low Voltage LV Fuse Open Fuse Open FUSE Ground Fault Ground Fault GF Over Heat on Heat sink Over Heat OH Electronic Thermal Trip E Thermal ETH Over Load Trip Over Load OLT Inverter H W Fault EEP Error ADC Offset HW Diag HW WDOG Error In Phase Open External Trip Input B External B EXTB Over Current 2 Arm Short ASHT Option Error Option OPT Output Phase Loss Phase Open PO Inverter Over Load Inv OLT IOLT Note There are WDOG error EEP error and ADC Offset for the inverter Hardware Fault the inverter will not reset when H W fault occurs Repair the fault before turning on the power Note Only the highest level fault will be displayed when multiple faults occur Related Functions FU2 01 to FU2 05 Previous Fault History FU2 06 Erase Fault History M FU2 01 to FU2 05 There are up to 5 faults saved E FU2 06 Erases the faults saved in FU2 01 to FU2 05 DRV 13 Motor Direction Set 7 Segment Keypad Factory Default oh oo This code sets the motor direction when using the 7 Segment keypad 7 Segment Display Description Run to forward direction 1 Run to reverse direction Chapter 6 Parameter Description DRV DRV 16 Speed Unit Selection DRV Hz Rpm Disp 16 Hz 16 0 Factory Defa
184. leration time Over Voltage load 2 Use regenerative resistor option Protection 2 Regenerative load at the output 3 Check line voltage 3 Line voltage high Current Limit 1 Load is larger than the inverter rating 1 Increase capacity of motor and inverter Protection 2 Incorrect inverter capacity selected 2 Select correct inverter capacity Overload 3 Set incorrect V F pattern 3 Select correct V F pattern Protection 1 Damaged due to over use of over current protection Exchange the fuse Fuse Damage 2 Damaged due to instant deceleration when motor is at an Caution The IGBT receives damages on many excessive excitation status occasions when Fuse Open Trip occurs 1 Cooling fan damaged or an alien substance inserted 1 Exchange cooling fans and or eliminate alien Heat Sink 2 Cooling system has faults substance Overheat 3 Ambient temperature high Check for alien substances in the heat sink Keep ambient temperature under 40 C Motor has overheated Reduce load and or running duty Load is larger than inverter rating Increase inverter capacity ETH level too low Adjust ETH level to an appropriate level 1 2 Electronic 3 4 Incorrect inverter capacity selected Select correct inverter capacity 5 6 Teia Set incorrect V F pattern Select correct V F pattern Operated too long at low speeds Install a cooling fan with a separate power supply Eliminate fault at circuit connected to external fault Ext
185. linking while DBU is operating normally by motor RIGHT regenerating energy LED Description RESET Press this switch to release OCT FAULT status Pressing this turns the OCT LED off POWER POWER LED is turned ON upon inverter Power ON because GREEN normally it is connected to the inverter RUN RUN LED is blinking while DBU is operating normally by motor GREEN regenerating energy When heat sink is overheated and the level exceeds its setting OHT RED limit overheat protection is activated and OHT LED is turned ON after DBU s signal is shut off Over current trip signal When overcurrent is flowed to the GBT OCT RED protection function shuts off the operating signal and OCT LED is tured ON LED Description POWER POWER LED is turned ON upon inverter Power ON because RED normally it is connected to the inverter RUN RUN LED is blinking while DBU is operating normally by motor GREEN _ regenerating energy OHT When heat sink is overheated and the level exceeds its setting RED limit overheat protection is activated and OHT LED is turned ON after DBU s signal is shut off OCT Over current trip signal When overcurrent is flowed to the iGBT protection function shuts off the operating signal and OCT LED is RED i ured ON FOT FOT LED is turned ON when fuse is opened to shut the RED overcurrent during braking 180 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING amp MAINTENANCE 8 1 Fault Display When a fault occurs the inv
186. lse Number Sub B EXT F pulse num 16 TaT 16 1024 Factory Default 1024 1024 This code sets the encoder pulse per rotation of encoder EXT 17 Filtering Time Constant for Pulse Input Signal Sub B EXT F filter 17 10 ms 1 10 Factory Default 10 ms 10 This is used to adjust the pulse input signal when the pulse input through Sub B board references the frequency This function is applied when EXT 14 is set to Reference Reference Frequency versus Analog Voltage Input Curve can be made by four parameters of EXT 18 EXT 21 18 0 0 kHz 18 0 0 Factory Default 0 0 kHz 0 0 This is the minimum pulse frequency at which the inverter outputs minimum frequency EXT F freq yl 19 0 00 Hz 19 0 00 Factory Default 0 00 Hz 0 00 This is the minimum frequency the inverter outputs when there is the minimum pulse frequency EXT 18 EXT F pulse x2 20 10 0 kHz 20 10 0 Factory Default 10 0 kHz 10 0 This is the maximum pulse frequency at which the inverter outputs maximum frequency EXT F freq y2 21 60 00 Hz 21 60 00 Factory Default 60 00 Hz 60 00 This is the maximum frequency the inverter outputs when there is the maximum pulse frequency EXT 20 co Chapter 6 Parameter Description EXT EXT 27 Torque Limit EXT 22 EXT 23 Gains for Sub B Board EXT Trq Limit Factory Default 3000 3000 27 180 21
187. ltage Time FU1 13 inactive when the value is set to 0 in control mode other than V F and Slip compensation Limits the active frequency Inverter operates at the freq FU1 23 range between upper freq limit FU1 25 and bottom freq Frequency Limit selection FU1 24 limit FU1 24 and higher lower freq value is entered it is FU1 25 automatically replaced by limit value Setting range FU1 20 Maximum freq to FU1 21 Base freq FU2 75 Select the DB resistor mode when the regenerative load Is FU2 76 connected Refer to DBU manual for more details Dynamic braking 43 Chapter 3 Function Settings 8 Operation starting method Parameter Name Code Description Motor starting method FU2 20 FU2 20 Power on run FU2 21 FU2 21 Restart after Fault Reset FU2 26 FU2 26 Number of Auto Restart Attempt FU2 27 FU2 27 Delay Time Before Auto Restart See parameter description for more details Starting method rUe Speed search function is available during Accel trip i FU2 23 E Speed Search Selection FU2 24 instant power failure restart after fault reset and auto FU2 25 restart See parameter description for more details 3 1 3 Application function setting 1 PID operation The inverter can be used to exercise process control e g flow rate air volume or pressure via PID feedback control Parameter Name Code Description PID control setting FU2 41 FU2 60 Parameters
188. meters are likely to display incorrect values caused by the high frequency PWM output voltage of the drive 8 5 2 Routine Inspection Be sure to check the following before operation m The conditions of the installation location m The conditions of the drive cooling m Abnormal vibration m Abnormal heating 8 5 3 Periodical Inspection Are there any loose bolt nut or rust caused by surrounding conditions If so tighten them up or replace them Are there any deposits inside the drive cooling fan If so remove using air Are there any deposits on the drive s PCB Printed Circuit Boards If so remove using air Are there any abnormalities in the various connectors of the drive s PCB If so check the condition of the connector in question Check the rotating condition of the cooling fan the size and condition of the capacitors and the connections with the magnetic contactor Replace them if there are any abnormalities 8 5 4 Internal Fuse Replacement When the internal fuse is opened the IGBT s should be checked thoroughly before replacing the fuse Contact the factory for replacement fuse information 187 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting amp Maintenance 8 6 Daily and Periodic Inspection Items z Period 26 2 z E E E Inspection A 5 5 Inspection Method Criterion a c i N Is there any dust Refer to the precautions Temperature T
189. mmand Forward Run When Closed and Stopped When Open 2 RX Reverse Run Command Reverse Run When Closed and Stopped When Open E JOG Jog Frequency Runs at Jog Frequency when the Jog Signal is ON The Direction is set by rs Reference the FX or RX Signal S When the BX Signal is ON the Output of the Inverter is Turned Off When 8 Motor uses an Electrical Brake to Stop BX is used to Turn Off the Output BX Emergency Stop EA a Signal When BX Signal is OFF Not Turned Off by Latching and FX Signal S 35 or RX Signal is ON Motor continues to Run A 2 RST Fault Reset Used for Fault Reset CM Sequence Common Common Terminal for Contact Inputs NC Not Used VR Frequency Setting Power Used as Power for Analog Frequency Setting Maximum Output is 12V D 12V 100mA a V1 Frequency Reference Used for 0 10V Input Frequency Reference Input Resistance is 20 K 22 Voltage Frequency Reference Used for 4 20mA Input Frequency Reference Input Resistance is 250 5 Current z 5Qu Frequency Setting Common Terminal for Analog Frequency Reference Signal and FM For Common Terminal Monitoring g Analog Output 0 12V Outputs One ol the Following Output Frequency Output Current Output E FM For External Monitoring Vortag DC Link Voltage and Torque Default is set to Output Frequency x Maximum Output Voltage and Output Current are 0 12V and 1mA 500Hz D Activates when Protective Function is Operating AC250V 1A or less se D
190. n LOP PL Loss of frequency reference from Option Board DPRAM time out LOR RL Loss of frequency reference from Option Board Communication fault LOV VL Loss of analog input signal V1 LOI IL Loss of analog input signal LOX xL a of frequency reference from Sub Board V2 or Related Functions O 48 Lost command selects the operation after determining the loss of frequency reference Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O The following table shows the selection in 1 0 48 Multi function input terminals can be defined for many Setting Range Description different applications The following table shows the ee i various definitions for them None 0 E ed anen GarO Note From 40HP and above inverter only BX is EA 4 Inverter cuts off its output after settable In 0 94 determining loss of frequency reference Setting Range Description Inverter stops by its Decel pattern and LCD 7 Seg Stop 2 Decel time after determining loss of Speed L 0___ Multi step speed Low frequency reference Speed M 1 Multi step speed Mid O 49 Time out sets the waiting time before aaa gt e pes E na determining the loss of reference signal Inverter waits to XCELM 4 Multi accel decel Mid determine the loss of a reference signal
191. n FU1 Note The set value is the percentage of FU2 33 Rated FU1 59 Stall Prevention Mode Selection Motor Current Setting Range 3rd bit 2nd bit 1st bit FU1 59 Description 0 0 1 001 Stall Prevention during Output Current Acceleration 0 1 0 010 Stall Prevention during Steady A TT TTT Speed OLT Level 4 0 0 100 Stall Prevention during Ti Deceleration me When FU1 59 is set to 111 stall prevention works during FU1 57 AN Ht accelerating steady speed and decelerating OLT Level aL Note The acceleration and deceleration time may take longer than the time set in DRV 01 DRV 02 when Stall Output Frequency Prevention is selected Note If stall prevention status persists inverter may stop during acceleration Related Functions FU2 33 Rated Motor Current gt Time Output Current Overload Trip Operation A stat bog AA Related Functions FU2 33 Rated Motor Current une FU1 60 O toa EE eae A FU1 59 Stall Prevention Mode Selection Bit set Output Frequency A FU1 60 Stall Prevention Level FU1 Stall prev 59 000 59 000 y gt Time Factory Default 000 000 This bit set parameter follows the conventions used in Stall Prevention during Acceleration 1 0 15 and 1 0 16 to show the ON bit set status Output Current A FU1 gt Stall level EUis iene 60 180 za 111 oaaae Factory Default 180 5 180 Time en FU1 60 Thi
192. nction does not function when either FU1 12 or FU1 13 is set to 0 Note FU1 12 Starting DC Injection Braking Voltage is also used as the DC Injection Braking Voltage for the multifunction input when the multifunction input is set to DC braking FU1 DcSt value 12 50 12 50 Factory Default FU1P DcSt time 13 0 0 sec 13 0 0 Factory Default 0 0 sec 0 0 Inverter holds the starting frequency for Starting DC Injection Braking Time It outputs DC voltage to the motor for FU1 13 Starting DC Injection Braking Time with the FU1 12 Starting DC Injection Braking Voltage before accelerating FU1 14 Pre excitation Time FU1 gt PreExTime 14 1 0 sec 4 10 Factory Default 1 0 sec When you set ON to the operation command FWD Output Frequency A REV the inverter conducts pre exciting automatically for the time specified by this parameter After FU1 14 Pre excitation Time elapses the FU1 22 inverter starts normal operation in the following gt Time graph Output Voltage Code LCD display Factory setting Setting range FU1 14 PreExTime 1 sec 0 60 sec BA Output freq gt Time Hz 1 t1 FU1 13 Starting DC Injection Braking Time Output Current t Pre excitation time Time Output E voltage M Run Command A FX CM E FX CM oi gt Time Starting DC Injection Braking Operation l j l ane Related function FU2 3
193. ncy Mode FU1 20 Maximum Frequency 1 0 06 1 0 10 Analog Current Input I Signal Adjustment This is used to adjust the analog current input signal when the terminal I references the frequency This function is applied when DRV 04 is set to V1 or V1 I Reference frequency versus Analog current input curve can be made by four parameters of I O 07 1 0 10 1 0 I filter 06 10 ms Factory Default 10 ms 10 10 This is the filtering time constant for I signal input If the T signal is affected by noise causing unstable operation of the inverter increase this value Increasing this value makes response time slower 1 0P I curr xl 07 4 00 mA Factory Default 4 00 mA 07 4 00 4 00 This is the minimum current of the I input at which inverter outputs minimum frequency 1 0 I freq yl 0 00 Hz 08 Factory Default 0 00 Hz This is the inverter output minimum frequency when there is minimum current 1 O 07 on the I terminal In torque mode the display is changed to I O gt I curr x2 09 20 00 mA 09 Factory Default 20 00 mA 20 00 20 00 This is the maximum current of the T input at which inverter outputs maximum frequency 1 0 I freq y2 60 00 Hz 10 Factory Default 60 00 Hz 10 This is the inverter output maximum frequency when there is the maximum current I O 09 on the I terminal In torque mode the dis
194. nd installation Handle according to the weight of the product Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended Install according to instructions specified in this manual Do not open the cover during delivery Do not place heavy items on the inverter Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct Do not drop the inverter or subject it to impact Use the ground impedance of 1000hm or less for 200 V Class and 10ohm or less for 400V class Take protective measures against ESD Electrostatic Discharge before touching the pcb for inspection or installation O Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions GY GE E EE E O Ambient 10 40 non freezing temp Relative 90 RH or less non condensing eS humidity Storage 20 65 E temp Protected from corrosive gas combustible gas oil mist 2 Location iT or dust Altitude Max 1 000m above sea level Max 5 9m sec 0 6G or Vibration less Atmospheric 70 106 kPa pressure 2 Wiring O Do not connect a power factor correction capacitor surge suppressor or RFI filter to the output of the inverter O The connection orientation of the output cables U V W to the motor will affect the direction of rotation of the motor O Incorrect terminal wiring could result in the equipment damage O Reversing the polarity of the terminals could damage the inverter O Only authorized person
195. nel familiar with LS inverter should perform wiring and inspections O Always install the inverter before wiring Otherwise you may get an electric shock or have bodily injury 3 Trial run O Check all parameters during operation Changing parameter values might be required depending on the load O Always apply permissible range of voltage to the each terminal as indicated in this manual Otherwise it could lead to inverter damage 4 Operation precautions O O OOO When the Auto restart function is selected stay away from the equipment as a motor will restart suddenly after an alarm stop The Stop key on the keypad is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been made Prepare an emergency stop switch separately If an alarm reset is made with the reference signal present a sudden start will occur Check that the reference signal is turned off in advance Otherwise an accident could occur Do not modify or alter anything inside the inverter Motor might not be protected by electronic thermal function of inverter Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting stopping of the inverter Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference Otherwise nearby electronic equipment may be affected IV O Incase of input voltage unbalance install AC reactor Power Factor capacitors and generators may become overheated and damaged due to potential high frequency nois
196. ng even if the input power is not applied Otherwise you may access the charged circuits and get an electric shock Wiring and periodic inspections should be performed at least 10 minutes after disconnecting the input power and after checking the DC link voltage is discharged with a meter below DC 30V Otherwise you may get an electric shock Operate the switches with dry hands Otherwise you may get an electric shock Do not use the cable when its insulating tube is damaged Otherwise you may get an electric shock Do not subject the cables to scratches excessive stress heavy loads or pinching Otherwise you may get an electric shock N CAUTION Install the inverter on a non flammable surface Do not place flammable material nearby Otherwise fire could occur Disconnect the input power if the inverter gets damaged Otherwise it could result in a secondary accident and fire Do not touch the inverter while the input power is applied or after removed It will remain hot for a couple of minutes Otherwise you may get bodily injuries such as skin burn or damage Do not apply power to a damaged inverter or to an inverter with parts missing even if the installation is complete Otherwise electric shock could occur Do not allow lint paper wood chips dust metallic chips or other foreign matter into the drive Otherwise fire or accident could occur OPERATING PRECAUTIONS 1 Handling a
197. ng of motor constant This parameter enables auto tuning of the motor constants If set to 1 All mode tuning type varies according to what control mode is set in FU2 39 Auto tuning can be done in two ways one is motor non rotation mode the other is motor rotation mode _ Auto tuning by non rotation mode Rs Lsigma 2 Auto tuning by rotation mode All Enc Test Tr Before performing Auto tuning set motor rating motor parameter in common setting and select the desired control mode in FU2 39 control mode selection However when auto tuning parameters related to encoder detail functions settings of vector control should be pre defined If Enc Test Tr and control mode are set to vector control Sub B board should be mounted Parameter Name Code Description Auto tuning FU2 40 No All Rs Lsigma Enc Test Tr ll a TEETE UE E resistance leakage display FU2 41 44 leakag inductance rotor filter time constant 39 Chapter 3 Function Settings FU2 40 Description No Motor constants calculation disabled All constants can be measured in this code but different constants are tuned according to control mode For VIF Slip compen Sensorless_S Sensorless_T No load current stator resistance leakage inductance stator inductance Al available lt Note Only no load current can be calculated during V F and Slip compensation For Vector_SPD Vector_T No load current stator resi
198. nput power AC110 220V 50 60Hz Note 1 Main circuit O Control circuit 2 Three types of External speed signal input available V V l Refer to Parameter list and description for more details 157 Chapter 7 Options 7 2 2 Terminal Configuration total 14 pins Aoc Boc A a B B FBA FBB GND enn 5v 5v vec vec 7 2 3 Terminal Description Section Terminal Name Description Bd AOC A Pulse Input Terminal Connects A signal of Open Collector type encoder ollector Encoder Type BOC B Pulse Input Terminal Connects B signal of Open Collector type encoder Signal A A Pulse Input Terminal Connects A signal of Line Drive type encoder Input Line Drive A A Pulse Input Terminal Connects A signal of Line Drive type encoder Type B B Pulse Input Terminal Connects B signal of Line Drive type encoder B B Pulse Input Terminal Connects B signal of Line Drive type encoder Signal Encoder FBA Encoder A Pulse Output Outputs A signal received from the encoder Signal Output Output FBB Encoder B Pulse Output Outputs B signal received from the encoder 5V 5V DC Input Terminal Provides 5V DC power output to encoder For Line Drive type 5V DC Minimum 0 5A 12 to 15V DC tput ae lis Encoder supply voltage Supply proper voltage according to the Power Supply Input Terminal from External Power aie VCC o Eco encoder specification P 12 to 15V DC Minimum 0 5A
199. nt x 10V x 10 41 150 12 00 Output V 1 0 41 10 V 10V FM 5G 1 0 40 1 0 44 Multi function Auxiliary Contact Output define AXA AXC I O Aux mode 44 Run 44 12 Factory Default Run 12 The auxiliary contact works Close when the defined condition has occurred Seling Range Description LCD 7 Seg FDT 1 0 Output frequency arrival detection FDT 2 1 Specific frequency level detection FDT 3 2 Frequency detection with pulse FDT 4 3 Frequency detection with contact closure Frequency detection with contact FOIS 4 ldosure inverted FDT 4 OL 5 Overload detection IOL 6 Inverter overload detection Stall 7 Stall prevention mode detection OV 8 Over voltage detection LV 9 Low voltage detection OH 10 Overheat detection Lost Command 11 Lost command detection Run 12 Inverter running detection Stop 13 Inverter stop detection Steady 14 Steady speed detection ling 2 Exchange signal outputs COMM line 16 Ssearch 17 _ Speed search mode detection Step pulse 18 Step detection in Auto mode Seq pulse 19 Sequence detection in Auto mode Ready 20__ Inverter ready detection Trv ACC 21 Traverse acceleration frequency Trv DEC 22 Traverse deceleration frequency MMC 23 Used for MMC operation Zspd Dect 24 0 rpm Detection in Vector control Torq Dect 25 Torque Detection 129 Chapter 6 Parameter Desc
200. ntinuously Generally this value is set to 100 and which means the rated motor current set in FU2 33 This value must be set less than FU1 52 ETH 1min Note The set value is the percentage of FU2 33 Rated Motor Current Load Current A FU1 51 ETH 1min FU1 52 ETH cont i gt Trip Time 1 minute Motor i2t Characteristic Curve FU1 gt Motor type 53 Self cool 53 0 Factory Default Self cool 0 To make the ETH function Motor t work correctly the motor cooling method must be selected correctly according to the motor Self cool is a motor that has a cooling fan connected directly to the shaft of the motor Cooling effects of a self cooled motor decrease when a motor is running at low speeds The motor current is derated as the motor speed decreases Forced cool is a motor that uses a separate motor to power a cooling fan As the motor speed changes the cooling effect does not change Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU1 Output Current Output Current A A FUI 54 TT A pe OL Level sa E Time Self Cool FU1 54 65 OL Level t 20Hz 60Hz AXA AXC ON gt Time gt e gt Load Current Derating Curve O e IN t1 FU1 55 Overload Warning Time Note Despite the motor current changing frequently due to load fluctuation or acceleration and deceleration the Overload Warning inverter calculates the i2t and accumulates the value to prot
201. o change the functions of the output terminals Q1 Q2 Q3 SUB A SUB C EXT 30 32 When you want to use the LM meter terminal output SUB A SUB C EXT 34 35 When you want to use the analog outputs AM1 AM2 terminals EXT 40 43 191 APPENDIX C PERIPHERAL DEVICES 1 The capacity of the MCCB should be 1 5 to 2 times the rated output current of the drive 2 Use an MCCB keep the drive from faulting out instead of using overheat protection 150 for one minute at the rated output current Inverter Motor Magnetic Wire mm AWG AC Input MCCB ELB AC Reactor DC Reactor Models HP Contactor R S T U V W Ground Fuse svoo8is5 2 1 TD125U EBS33b GMC 9 2 14 2 14 3 5 12 10A 2 13mH 5 7A 7 00 mH 5 4 A SVO15iS5 2 2 TD125U EBS33b GMC 12 2 14 2 14 3512 15A 1 20mH 10A 4 05 mH 9 2 A SV022i85 2 3 TO125U EBS33b GMC 18 2 14 2 14 3 512 25A 0 88 mH 14A 2 92 mH 13A SV037iS5 2 5 TD125U EBS33b GMC 32 3 5 12 3 5 12 3 5 12 40A 0 56 mH 20A 1 98 mH 19A SVO55iS5 2 7 5 TO125U EBS53b GMC 40 5 5 10 5 5 10 5 5 10 40 A 0 39 mH 30 A 1 37 mH 29 A SV075iS5 2 10 TD125U EBS63b GMC 50 8 8 8 8 5 5 10 50A 0 28 mH 40 A 1 05 mH 38 A SV110iS5 2 15 TO125U EBS103b GMC 6
202. ode is set to 0 KeyPad 1 or 1 KeyPad 2 command freq is not settable above FU1 20 Maximum Frequency 2 Monitoring function setting Command frequency displayed during stop Output current frequency displayed during run Analog digital frequency command setting in DRV 04 Frequency or Torque Mode e DRV 04 Frequency or Torque Mode is set to 2 V1 3 1 or 4 V1 l frequency command is set via 1 0 01 10 Analog Frequency command Torque Refer to I O 01 10 for detail description DRV 16 Speed Unit Selection is set to 1 Rpm speed is displayed in Rom e if FU2 39 is set to 4 Sensorless_T or 6 Vector_TRQ speed is displayed as the percent to the rated torque Torque command is settable in DRV 04 Frequency or Torque Mode Factory default setting 100 Up to 150 settable 79 e Setting the DRV 04 Frequency or Torque Mode t Note In torque mode speed unit is automatically displayed in Setti ng DRV 04 Parameter Name Programming Description 0 KeyPad 1 1 KeyPad 2 Digital freq command 1 In DRV 00 press the PROG key 2 Enter the desired freq 3 Press the ENT key to write the new value into memory 1 In DRV 00 press the PROG key 2 Press the t Up or 1 Down key to set the desired freq while the inverter keeps running 3 Press the ENT key to write the new value into memory 4 V1 l Analog freq command
203. of scramble operation The output value is determined by Trv Scr Frequency Trv Amp Frequency 100 Trv Scr 100 O Aux Motor 4 m Main Motor APP 04 Traverse Accel Time APP 05 Traverse Decel Time APP amp Trv Acc Time MMC Diagram 04 2 0 sec MN 2 0 Factory Default 2 0 sec 2 0 APPPTrv Dec Time 05 3 0 sec 05 3 0 Factory Default 3 0 sec 3 0 Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for traverse operation 146 The Trv Acc terminal set in EXT 30 to EXT 32 is ON during traverse acceleration time Open Collector Output t The Trv Dec terminal set in EXT 30 to EXT 32 is ON during traverse deceleration time Open Collector Output E APP 04 and APP 05 should be set to a value less than APP 03 If not traverse control does not accomplished correctly APP 06 Traverse Offset Hi Setting APP 07 Traverse Offset Lo Setting APP gt Trv Off Hi 06 0 0 06 oo Factory Default 0 0 This code makes positive offset during traverse operation by multi function input terminal When the Trv Off Hi terminal is ON the offset frequency is added to the reference frequency To use this function set a terminal out of multi function input terminals P1 P2 P3 to Trv Off Hi in 1 0 12 1 0 14 The offset value is determined by Trv Off Hi Frequency Reference Frequency Trv Off Hi 100 APP gt Trv Off Lo 07 0 0 07 oo Factory Default 0 0 This code mak
204. ol mode encoder setting should be done as indicated above If the parameter value of actual motor is set in common setting execute Auto tuning before selecting vector control mode 40 Chapter 3 Function Settings Parameter Name Code Description Control Mode Selection FU2 39 Selects Vector_SPD or Vector_TRQ Forward Reverse Sets the FWD REV limit to the torque current Torque Limit tl P Gain Gain for Sensored Vector_SPD EXT 25 EXT 26 Sets P I Gain for Vector_SPD control EXT 50 EXT 51 EXT 52 EXT 53 Speed Limit setting Sets speed limit for Vector_TRQ Zero Speed Detection Sets on off of Multi function output terminal relay when the EXT 54 EXT 55 Level Bandwidth motor speed reaches to 0 Torque Detectan ENS EXE Deigen levellbandwndtvol Tora Level Bandwidth 3 1 2 Advanced function setting SV iS5 inverter features advanced function parameters to maximize efficiency and performance of the motor It is recommended to use as factory setting unless parameter value change is necessary 1 VIF control Parameter Name Code Description Use it according to load characteristics If User V F is VIF Pattern FU 1 29 selected user can select the optimum output V F characteristic for the application and load characteristics in FU1 30 FU1 37 Used to output torque in an intended direction Inverter stops acceleration for the preset FU2 08 Dwell time
205. on Analog output FM Operation condition Control mode Sensorless Speed control Frequency command Multi function input from SUB A and 8 step speed operation Multi speed 7 Jog freq 1 Accel time 5 Sec Decel time 5 Sec Drive mode Run Stop and speed output via terminal FX RX Wiring Output freq Hz 4 Output freq meter 0 10V Pulse Multi speed freq setting range DRV 00 Speed 0 0 20 Speed 4 DRV 05 Speed 1 0 21 Speed 5 DRV 06 Speed 2 0 22 Speed 6 DRV 07 Speed 3 0 23 Speed 7 Step Parameter setting Code Description 1 Control Mode Selection FU2 39 Set it to Sensorless_S 2 Drive mode DRV 3 Set it to FX RX 1 3 Multi function input EXT 2 4 Set P3 P4 P5 to Speed L Speed M Speed H FM Frequency Meter Output Selection 1 0 40 Set it to Frequency output Output V 10V x output freq x output gain ex100 Max freq x 100 Motor runs in forward direction at the set freq via P3 4 5 if Fx terminal is ON Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 5 sec if FX terminal is OFF Motor runs in reverse direction at the set freq via P3 4 5 if RX terminal is ON Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 5 sec if RX terminal is OFF 5 FM Output Adjustment 1 0 41 6 Terminal FX 7 Terminal RX 49 Chapter 3 Function Setting Operation Vector_SPD Control Ex
206. option manual for more details 153 Chapter 7 Options The following table shows the Sub Board Selection Guide according to Functions Sub Board Type Function Descripti oa SUB A Board SUB B Board SUB C Board EXT 02 Multi Function Input Terminal P4 f ft A EXT 05 ExT 06 Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal Y To Y Y ext o7 V2 Input Minimum Voltage EXT 09 v2 Input Maximum Voltage ExT t0 Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Maximum Voltage vo vy ExT 14 Usage forPulseinputSignl ExT t5 Pulse InputSignalSelecon 22222 Yo Y y ExT 16 Encoder Pulse Selecion Y EXT 17 Filteing Time Constant for Pulse Input Signal Y Y gt ExT 18 Pulse Input Minimum Frequency Fre tput ding to Pulse Input Mini Frequency Pulse Input Maximum Frequency E A NA F requency Output corresponding to Pulse Input Maximum ie 7 Frequenc ExT 22 P GainforPG Option oyo o O exT 23 Gain for PG Option Yoyo ext 24 Slip Frequency forPG Option EL EXT 25 P Gain for Sensored Vector sD YC EXT 26 Gain for Sensored Vector sD YC Forward Torque Limit Reverse Torque Limit ext 30 Multifunction Output Termina a Y o Y EXT 31 Multifunction Output Temin Y o S O EXT 32 Multifunction Output Termina 3 Y o S ExT 34 LM Load Meter Output Selection J yvy YC ext 35 LM Output Adjustment YA ExT 40 AM Analog Meter 1 OutputSelecion y EXT 41 AM1
207. ormance this value must be set as exact as possible Set 0 for loads that has load inertia less than 10 times that of motor inertia Set 1 for loads that have load inertia about 10 times that of motor inertia 105 Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 FU2 38 Carrier Frequency FU2mCarrier freq 38 5 kHz 38 5 Factory Default 5 kHz 5 LCD nee Code meray Description Setting Setting range FU2 Carrier 38 Carrier freq Freuen 5 kHz 1 15 kHz This parameter affects the audible sound of the motor noise emission from the inverter inverter termperature and leakage current If the ambient temperature where the inverter is installed is high or other equipment may be affected by potential inverter noise set this value lower If set above 10kHz use it by reducing 5 1kHz of the rated current Setting Carrier freqeuncy set below 2 5 kHz when the FU2 39 Control mode selection is set to Vector_SPD Vector_TRQ could weaken the control performance Note Max carrier frequency for inverters above 40HP 30kW are indicated as below Note Setting Vector_SPD Vector_TRQ is only valid when the inverter is equipped with SUB B board and EXT 12 F mode is set to Feed back Vector control comprises of Vector_SPD Vector_TRQ with Sensorless_S and Sensorless_T VIF control This parameter controls the voltage frequency ratio constant
208. ors provided with the DB resistor P1 is ON TH1 TH2 Shorted at normal ambient temp and P1 is OFF TH1 TH2 Open at overheated status Connect the thermal sensor to one of the multi function input P1 P2 or P3 I O 12 14 setting Ext Trip B TH1 TH2 171 Chapter 7 Options e DB Resistor Unit wiring for 15 100 HP Inverter DB Resistor DB Unit Max distance between P amp P2 5m Short FWD Run Stop REV Run Stop RX Max Current thru Fault reset Jog Max distance between N amp N 5m Wires should be Twisted Analog freq output 2 PC 5mA DB resistor terminal Terminal description B1 B2 Connect the DB Resistor to DBU terminal P B1 B2 Thermal sensors provided with the DB resistor THI TH P1 is ON TH1 TH2 Shorted at normal ambient temp and P1 is OFF TH1 TH2 Open at overheated status Connect the thermal sensor to one of the multi function input P1 P2 or P3 I O 12 14 setting Ext Trip B For DBU refer to 7 7 DB Unit 172 4 DB Resistor Dimensions Chapter 7 Options Dimensions mm DB Resistor Inverter Model Type W H D A B C BR0400W150J SV 008185 2 1 64 412 40 400 6 3 BR0400W060J SV 0151S5 2 1 64 412 40 400 6 3 BR0400W050J SV 022185 2 1 64 412 40 400 6 3 BROG00W033J SV 037185 2 2 128 390 43 64 370 5 BRO800W020J SV 055185 2 3 220 345 93 140 330
209. play is changed to Setting FU2 39 Control mode select to Vector_Torque or Sensorless_T the setting value is changed to Torque Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O Reference Frequency 1 0 10 1 0 08 A Analog Voltage 1 0 07 1 0 09 Input V1 Reference Frequency vs Analog Current Input 4 to 20mA Related Functions DRV 04 Frequency Mode FU1 20 Maximum Frequency 1 0 11 Criteria for Analog Input Signal Loss value as below Code Default Setting Code Default Setting 0 07 4 mA 0 20 mA 1 O 09 20 mA O 20 mA 1 0 08 0 0 150 1 0 10 100 O 150 1 0 Wire broken 11 None 1 0 Factory Default None 0 This is to set the criteria for analog input signal loss when DRV 04 Frequency Mode is set to V1 or V1 I Following table shows the setting value Setting Range aoe LCD 7 Seg Description None 0 Does not check the analog input signal The inverter determines that the frequency reference is lost when the analog input haltar signal is less than half of the minimum value 1 0 02 or I O 07 The inverter determines that the frequency id 2 reference is lost when the analog input signal is less than the minimum value I O 02 or 1 0 07 When the analog input signal is lost inverter displays the following table Setting a LCD 7 Seg Descriptio
210. quency Mode EXT 5 10 V2 Analog Ref Freq setting for V2 1 0 01 to 1 0 10 Analog Signal Setting 1 0 12 to 1 0 14 Multi Function Input Related Functions FU2 PID P gain 52 1 0 EXT 15 to EXT 21 Pulse Input Setting FU2 50 to FU2 54 PID Feedback 02 1 0 1 0 o Factory Default 1 0 FU2 48 PID F Gain FU2 49 PID Reference Mode Selection FU2 50 PID Output Direction Selection FU2 PID F Gain 48 0 0 48 0 0 Factory Default 0 0 0 0 This code sets F Gain value for use of Feed Forward control Set the proportional gain for PID control When P Gain is set at 100 and I Time at 0 0 second it means the PID controller output is 100 for 100 error value P Gain is set to 50 and l Time to 0 0 sec PID controller output becomes 50 for 100 error value FU2 PID I time 53 10 0 sec 53 10 0 Factory Default 10 0 sec 10 0 o Set the integral gain for PID control This is the time the PID controller takes to output 100 for 100 error value FU2P PID D time 54 0 0 ms 54 0 0 Factory Default 0 0 ms 0 0 Set the differential gain for PID control FU2 gt PID limit H 55 60 00 Hz 55 60 00 Factory Default 60 00 Hz 60 00 This is the frequency upper limit at which the output frequency is limited during PID control FU2 gt PID limit L 56 0 00 Hz Factory Default 0 00 Hz 0 00 This is the frequency lower limit at which the output frequency is limi
211. r components be sure to disconnect AC Input supply and wait until the Main Electrolytic Capacitors DCP DCN discharge Contactor P1 P2 E U Electrolytic S capacitors V T w Dynamic Braking Unit Option for 15 30HP models E Diode Module Check Check point Resistance to be Good R S T P1 50 k ohms or more R S T N 50 k ohms or more E Charge Resistor Check Check point Resistance to be Good Contactor terminals Depending on model m DB Dynamic Braking IGBT Option Check point Resistance to be Good B2 N 50 k ohms or more G N A few kilo ohms IGBT Module Check Check point Resistance to be Good B2 N 50 k ohms or more G N A few kilo ohms 186 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting amp Maintenance 8 5 Maintenance The S5 series is an industrial electronic product with advanced semiconductor elements However temperature humidity vibration and aging parts may still affect it To avoid this it is recommended to perform routine inspections 8 5 1 Precautions m Be sure to remove the drive power input while performing maintenance m Be sure to perform maintenance only after checking that the bus has discharged The bus capacitors in the electronic circuit can still be charged even after the power is turned off m The correct output voltage can only be measured by using a rectifier voltage meter Other voltage meters including digital voltage
212. r fans pumps etc User V F pattern is used for special applications Users can adjust the volts frequency ratio according to the application This is accomplished by setting the voltage and frequency respectively at four points between starting frequency and base frequency The four points of voltage and frequency are set in FU1 30 through FU1 37 Output Voltage A 100 Output gy Frequency Freq Base V F Pattern Linear Output Voltage A 100 Output N Frequency Freq Base V F Pattern Square Output Voltage A 100 FU1 37 FU1 35 FU1 33 FU1 31 Output FU1 30 7 er 36 X Frequency FU1 32 FU1 34 Freq Base V F Pattern User V F Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU1 FU1 30 FU1 37 User V F Frequency and Voltage FU1 User freq 1 30 15 00 Hz 30 15 00 Factory Default 15 00 Hz 15 00 FU1 User volt 1 a sere 31 25 Factory Default 25 25 FU User freq 4 36 60 00 Hz 36 60 00 Factory Default 60 00 Hz 60 00 FU1 User volt 4 ae Dos 37 100 Factory Default 100 100 These functions are available only when User V F is selected in FU1 29 V F pattern Users can make the custom V F pattern by setting four points between FU1 22 Starting Frequency and FU1 21 Base Frequency Output Voltage A 100 FU1 37 FU1 35 FU1 33 FU1 31 Output X Frequency Freq Base i FU1 36
213. r is used in communication between inverter and communication board I O Baud rate 47 9600 bps 4 9600 Factory Default 9600 9600 133 I OPLost command 13 48 None Factory Default None 0 There are two kinds of loss of frequency reference One is the loss of digital frequency reference and the other is of analog frequency reference Loss of digital frequency reference is applied when DRV 04 Frequency Mode is set to Keypad 1 or Kepad 2 At this time the Loss means the communication error between inverter and keypad or communication board during the time set in 1 O 49 Loss of analog frequency reference is applied when DRV 04 Frequency Mode is set to other than Keypad T or Kepad 2 At this time the Loss is determined by the criteria set in I O 11 Criteria for Analog Input Signal Loss ae ae Seg Description None 0 Inverter keeps on operating at the previous frequency a 1 Inverter cuts off its output Sto 2 Inverter stops with Decel time DRV p 02 and Decel pattern FU1 26 1 0 Time out 49 1 0 sec 49 1 0 1 0 Factory Default 1 0 sec This is the time inverter determines whether there is a frequency reference or not If there is no frequency reference satisfying I O 11 during this time inverter determines that it has lost of frequency reference Related Functions DRV 04 Frequency Mode 1 0 11 Criteria for Analog Signal
214. ra Ka saavan Nanana NANa aaar aeaa aranea Kanaa ANa Ka AoA Vana Ka YAKARAK YA Wahana Waa AA Riana 6 1 2 Environmental Conditions sssscicsccccssseccsssssssssscsseutssscsessescceaccerscsscivsntsaccucssvsstssesceutessstesinsssuecdccattasiusbonscdaccenssissness 6 1 3 MOUNIING rr AA AAN 6 1 4 Other PreCAUtions iii veuissuncctneuss uctiesubesduccunesil suri stheuenccuie sul ustbestnadeussulcatbevebesunesnaveiesvnecuneaubudliveoe 7 1 5 A iaaa A AAAA AADA AANE TA AE AEE OAA AAE NAA OA 8 1 6 Basic WAKING ses siisii ieaiaia ieii aa 13 1 7 Power Teima Saa dise 14 1 8 Control Terminadas id 19 CHAPTER 2 OPERATION 0 a 23 2 1 Parameter Gros a 23 2 2 LCD Keypad cacon 24 2 3 T A Pad EEE T 28 2 4 Operation Method scvscisiviencssccsccevesuvesscescsscescssvesescccccscrsvrscsvsscenccerssussvnsedcescenssvesesccacesersvesuisvedenceucedursvesescesceatsvednie 32 2 5 Operating Exam plessissicssssssssccssisssssssscsacaassnsssesssscasecassrtsssosessecsatsinssssseassasedtssvsassccsncansarsinssteasaccattansstsovaasatcetisnsiiee 33 CHAPTER 3 VARIOUS FUNCTION SETTING amp DESCRIPTION csssssssssssssssesessssssesesssseseseseesaes 38 3 1 Function Setting A 38 3 2 Operation EXAM plese vsicssseiscescucvsvissvsvceusccssivsicvvsveuvcustivssivvdacsucesssvsduestdvesceusesiiensdacdesscrstiessseuceaustusiievaubdustweunse 46 CHAPTER 4 QUICK START PROCEDUREG ccccssssssssssessssssssessssssssesesessssesesssseacseessseatseessseatsesssaeaes 51 4 1 Operating USINGKSYPAd wsc
215. rating LOP Loss of reference from the Option Eliminate cause of fault Method when the LOR aa Speed LOV V1 Reference is LOI I Lost aot Sub V2 ENC Inverter 1 Load is larger than inverter rating 1 Increase motor and or inverter capacity Overload i Incorrect inverter capacity selected a Select correct inverter capacity MIC Fail M C does not work properly Check the operating contact is closed after giving signal 184 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting amp Maintenance 8 3 Troubleshooting Condition Check Point 1 Main circuit inspection s the input line voltage normal Is the LED in the inverter is lit Is the motor connected correctly 2 Input signal inspection t Check the operating signal input to the inverter Check the forward and the reverse signal input simultaneously to the inverter The Motor Does Not m Check the command Irequeney signal input to the inverter Rotate 3 Parameter setting inspection g the reverse prevention FU1 03 function set g the operation mode FU1 01 set correctly g the command frequency set to 0 4 Load inspection Is the load too large or is the motor jammed Mechanical brake 5 Other Is the alarm displayed on the keypad or is the alarm LED lit STOP LED blinks The Motor Rotates Is the phase sequence of the output terminal U V W correct in Opposite ls the starting signal forward reverse connected correctly Directions
216. ration when the BX terminal is turned OFF Take caution when using this function Option Option Fault Fault at the internal option of the inverter Inverter HIW A fault signal is output when an error occurs to the control circuitry of the HW Diag HW Fault inverter There are the Wdog error the EEP error and the ADC Offset for this fault COM Error Communication da CPU Error This fault is displayed when the inverter cannot communicate with the keypad 181 Fuse Open Over Heat E Thermal Electronic Thermal Low Voltage Chapter 8 Troubleshooting amp Maintenance K Displ Sl TE KANT Description 7 Segment Function According to the 1 0 48 Operating Method when the Frequency Reference is Lost setting there are three modes continue operation decelerate and stop and free run LOP Displayed when option frequency reference is lost DPRAM time out LOR Displayed when option frequency reference is lost Communication network fault LOV Displayed when V1 analog frequency reference is lost LOI Displayed when I analog frequency reference is lost Operating Method when the Frequency Reference is Lost LOX Displayed when sun board V2 ENC analog frequency reference is lost The inverter turns off its output when the output current of the inverter flows EEI IOL Inte Orerioag more than the rated level 150 for 1 minute 200 for 0 5 seconds Inverter uses NC thermal sensor for detecting heat sink temperatur
217. ription I O FDT 1 When the output frequency reaches the reference frequency target frequency AXA AXC terminal is CLOSED Output Frequenc j eae Reference Frequency de 1 0 43 12 gt Time AXA AXC CLOSED gt Time AXA AXC configured as FDT 1 FDT 2 AXA AXC is CLOSED when the reference frequency is in 1 0 43 FDT Bandwidth centered on I O 42 FDT Frequency and the output frequency reaches l 0 43 centered on I O 42 Output Frequency Reference Frequency 1 0 42 oe 10 43 2 gt Time AXA AXC CLOSED gt Time AXA AXC configured as FDT 2 FDT 3 AXA AXC is CLOSED when the output frequency reaches the band centered on the FDT frequency The output is OPENED when the output frequency goes outside the FDT bandwidth centered on the FDT frequency Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O OL AXA AXC is CLOSED when the output current has reached the FU1 54 Overload Warning Level for the FU1 55 Overload Warning Time Output Frequency EA A cn tf Nina 104349 A eee enn lt Output Current A A ee TT o gt Time OL level AXA AXC ION ON i Time gt Time FU1 54 arar O tT a Rai AXA AXC configured as FDT 3 eel FDT 4 AXA AXC i l AXA AXC is CLOSED when the output frequency AM gt Time reaches the FDT frequency The output is OPENED ETE when the output frequency goes below the
218. rol This is used to maintain constant tension of material with the speed difference between main motor and subordinate motor APP 32 to APP 33 Draw Parameters DRV 04 Frequency Mode 1 0 01 to 1 0 10 Analog Signal Input EXT 06 to EXT 10 Analog Input Setting 1 0 12 to 1 0 14 Multi Function Input EXT 02 to EXT 04 Multi Function Input Frequency APP 24 during Sleep Delay Time APP 23 While in the sleep state inverter keeps monitoring and initiates Wake Up function when the real value of the controlling amount has decreased below the Wake Up level APP 25 APP 02 Traverse Amplitude APPPTrv Amp 02 0 0 Note Only one auxiliary motor can be connected with 02 0 0 2 AUX terminal on control terminal strip without using MMC Factory Default 0 0 00 Option Board This code sets the frequency amplitude of traverse operation The value is the percentage of reference frequency The output value is determined by Trv Amp Frequency Reference Freq Trv Amp 100 Related Functions APP 08 to APP 31 MMC Parameters DRV 04 Frequency Mode FU2 47 PID Operation Selection 1 0 01 to 1 0 10 Analog Signal Input EXT 15 to EXT21 Pulse Input Signal 1 0 12 to 1 0 14 Multi Function Input EXT 30 to EXT 32 Multi Function Output APP 03 Traverse Scramble Amplitude APP Trv Scr S CON ne O 03 0 0 03 0 0 Factory Default 0 0 0 0 This code sets the frequency amplitude
219. rovides encoder input terminals AOC BOC A A B B encoder output terminals FBA FBB and power terminals 5V input Vcc output This board provides three multi function input terminals P4 P5 P6 one multi Sub C 3 function output terminal Q1 isolated second input frequency reference V2 and two analog meters AM1 AM2 See Chapter 7 Options for more detail descriptions Sub B 2 136 Setting Range nae LCD 7 Seg Description Speed L 0 Multi Step Speed Low Speed M 1 Multi Step Speed Mid Speed H 2 Multi Step Speed High XCEL L 3 Multi Accel Decel Low XCEL M 4 Multi Accel Decel Mid XCEL H 5 Multi Accel Decel High Dc brake 6 IDC injection braking during stop 2nd Func 7 Exchange to 2 4 functions Exchange 8 Exchange to commercial power line Reserved 9 Reserved for future use Up 10 Up drive Down 11 Down drive 3 Wire 12 3 wire operation Ext Trip A 13 External trip A Ext Trip B 14 External trip B Term Clear 15 Used for PID control Open loop 16 Exchange between PID mode and V F mode Main drive 17 Exchange between Option and Inverter Analog hold 18 Hold the analog input signal XCEL stop 19 Disable accel and decel P Gain2 20 Used for PID control SEQ L 21 Sequence operation Low SEQ M 22 Sequence operation Mid SEQ H 23 Sequence operation High Exchange between Sequenc
220. run Command Frequency Displays the Command Frequency during stop 29 Chapter 2 Operation 2 3 2 Procedure for Setting Data 7 Segment Keypad EH In DRV Group 1 Rotate the encoder knob until the desired parameter code is displayed 2 Press PROG ENT key to go into the programming mode then the display blinks 3 Press SHIFT ESC key to move the cursor to the desired digit 4 Rotate the encoder knob to change the data 5 Press PROG ENT key to enter the changed data E In FUN1 Group 1 Rotate the encoder knob until parameter code 20 is displayed in drive group 2 Press PROG ENT key to go into the FUN1 group 3 Rotate the encoder knob until the desired parameter code is displayed 4 Press PROG ENT key to go into the programming mode then the display blinks 5 Press SHIFT ESC key to move the cursor to the desired digit 6 Rotate the encoder knob to change the data 7 Press PROG ENT key to enter the changed data E In FUN2 Group 1 Rotate the encoder knob until parameter code 21 is displayed in drive group 2 Goto step 2 of In FUN1 Group above and follow the rest procedure m In I O Group 1 Rotate the encoder knob until parameter code 22 is displayed in drive group 2 Goto step 2 of In FUN1 Group above and follow the rest procedure 30 Chapter 2 Operation 2 3 3 Parameter Navigation 7 Segment Keypad The parameter group moves directly to DRV
221. s from OV to 10V EXT 41 and EXT 43 are used to adjust the AM output value Frequency The AM terminal outputs inverter output frequency The output value is determined by AM Output Voltage Output freq Max freq x 10V X AM Output Gain EXT41 42 100 Chapter 6 Parameter Description EXT Current The AM terminal outputs inverter output current The output value is determined by AM Output Voltage Output current Rated current x 10V X AM Output Gain EXT41 42 150 Voltage The AM terminal outputs inverter output voltage The output value is determined by AM Output Voltage Output voltage Max output voltage x 10V X AM Output Gain EXT41 42 100 DC link vtg The AM terminal outputs the DC link voltage of inverter The output value is determined by AM Output Voltage DC link voltage Max DC link voltage x 10V X AM Output Gain EXT41 42 100 Torque The AM terminal outputs inverter output torque The output value is determined by AM Output Voltage Output Torque Rated Torque current x 10V X AM Output Gain EXT41 42 150 EXT 50 53 Speed limit for Torque mode operation LCD noe Factory Setting Code display Description setting range EXT Speed Speed Limit 0 50 Limit Level 100 100 EXT Speed Speed Limit o 0 54 Bias Bias 100 200 EXT Speed Speed Limit 1 1 10 52 Gain Gain 0 EXT Speed Limit 1 Reverse 53 SPER DI Direction Forwar
222. s function is used to prevent the motor from stalling Stall Level ec HH 1 ce by reducing the inverter output frequency until the motor current decreases below the stall prevention level This Output rrequency function can be selected for each mode of acceleration steady speed and deceleration via bit combination Note The set value is the percentage of FU2 33 Rated gt Time Motor Current l Stall Prevention during Steady Speed Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU1 DC Link Voltage A 390VDC or 680V DC gt Time Output Frequency A gt Time Stall Prevention during Deceleration FU1 99 Return Code 7 Segment Keypad 99 1 Factory Default 1 This code is used to exit a group when using a 7 segment keypad After pressing PROG ENT key set the value to 1 and press the PROG ENT key again to exit Related Functions FU2 99 Return Code 1 0 99 Return Code EXT 99 Return Code COM 99 Return Code 98 6 3 Function 2 Group FU2 FU2 00 Jump to desired code FU2 gt Jump code 00 1 Factory Default 1 Jumping directly to any parameter code can be accomplished by entering the desired code number This code is available only with LCD keypad FU2 01 Previous Fault History 1 FU2 02 Previous Fault History 2 FU2 03 Previous Fault History 3 FU2 04 Previous Fault History 4 FU2 05 Previous Fault History 5 FU2 06
223. s the DB turn on signal OFF when the Continuous Turn On Time expires during dynamic braking and an over voltage fault could occur When this happens increase the deceleration time or install an external high duty DB resistor e Install an exterior high duty DB resistor when the load accelerates and decelerates frequently Set the FU2 75 DB Resistor Mode selection to Ext DB R and set the FU2 76 Duty of DB Resistor Refer to Basic Wiring in Chapter 1 Installation or Power Terminal Wiring e This does not apply to 40 100 HP inverters They need the Optional DB unit to use DB resistor FU2 76 Duty of DB Dynamic Braking Resistor FU2 DB ED 76 10 16 10 Factory Default 10 10 Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 This must be set when using an external DB resistor e Exchange the motor connection from the 1st motor to the The duty is calculated by ED Decel time 100 2nd motor or the opposite when the motor is stopped Accel time Steady speed time Decel time Stop Over voltage or over current fault can occur when the motor connection is exchanged during operation status time e The User V F function of FU1 29 V F Pattern is used for both the 1st motor and the 2nd motor FU2 79 Software Version FU2 91 Parameter Read FU2 S W Version FU2 92 Parameter Write 79 Ver X X 19 KX Factory Default Ver X X FUZ Para read O Noi HSS Displ
224. sistance Rs Leakage inductance Lsigma Stator inductance Ls and No load current Noload Curr are calculated 3 If FU2 40 is set to Rs Lsigma Stator resistance Rs Leakage inductance Lsigma are calculated 4 Either PG Status or Rotor constant Tr can be checked with PG option card installed Motor non rotation mode when set to Rs Lsigma 1 Stator resistance Rs Leakage inductance Lsigma can be calculated by setting FU2 40 to Rs Lsigma 2 User should set Stator resistance Rs No load current Noload Curr and Rotor constants Tr 3 To automatically calculate the Stator inductance Ls No load current Noload Curr and Rotor constants Tr set the motor rotation mode and FU2 40 to All With PG option card installed 1 Set EXT 12 to Feed back 2 Set EXT 15 to A B 3 If FU2 40 is set to All Stator resistance Rs Leakage inductance Lsigma Stator inductance Ls No load current Noload Curr and Rotor constants Tr are calculated 4 Stator resistance Rs Leakage inductance Lsigma can be calculated by setting FU2 40 to Rs Lsigma 5 User should set the Stator inductance Ls No load current Noload Curr and Rotor constants Tr if FU2 40 is set to Rs Lsigma Without PG option card installed 1 If FU2 40 is set to All Stator resistance Rs Leakage inductance Lsigma Stator inductance Ls No load current Noload Curr are calculated 2 If FU2 40 is set to Rs Ls
225. ssssssssessesssssssssesseesessssssssseeseesessesseeseessesesseeneeatesssseeneeaeesesaeeneeass 163 7 5 Keypad tata li 165 7 6 A NO 167 7 7 DB Dymantie Brake MOS 175 CHAPTER 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 MAINTENANCE csccssssssssssssssesessesesssessesessssssaesessesessesesaeess 181 8 1 Fault Display iscsi 181 8 2 Fault ROMO inician anar a 183 8 3 Trouble adi s 185 8 4 How to Check Power Components sssssccssssssssssssessessessessssssssessesessesessessssassaesessesseaseaeeaesnesessseaeeaeeaesansaeas 186 8 5 MANN ade 187 8 6 Daily and Periodic Inspection Items cccsccsscsicsscssersiensconcsscvansssensconssussnssscenseosssuedancssecnsnsssescenthsucssenscantensendssvens 188 APPENDIX A FUNCTIONS BASED ON USE c csccsssssessesessesessesessesesseseesesesseeeeseeesseeneseeeeseeneaeeesateeeseeeeaees 189 APPENDIX B PARAMETERS BASED ON APPLICATION ccsssssessesessesessesessesessesesesesseeessesesseeeeaeeeeaees 190 APPENDIX G PERIPHERAL DEVICES cuisine 192 DECLARATION OF CONFORMA 194 USER SELECTION GUIDE iS5 SPECIFICATIONS 230V Class 1 30HP Model Number SV xxx iS5 2 008 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220 Motor HP 1 2 3 5 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 Rating kW 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 Capacity kVA 1 9 3 0 45 6 1 9 1 12
226. stance leakage inductance stator inductance encoder test rotor filter time constant Rs Lsigma Calculates stator resistance leakage inductance Enc Test Calculates the encoder status Tr Calculates Rotor filter time constant 6 Sensorless vector control Set FU2 39 to 2 Sensorless_S or 3 Sensorless_T to enable Sensorless vector control It is strongly recommended to perform Auto tuning for Sensorless before starting Sensorless control in order to maximize performance Two types of Sensorless vector control are available Sensorless_S or Sensorless_T Parameter Name Code Description Control mode selection FU2 39 Select Sensorless_S or Sensorless_T P gain for sensorless control FU2 45 FU2 46 Set gain for Sensorless_S control Starting freq FU1 22 Starting freq of the motor 7 Vector control Set FU2 39 to 4 Vector_SPD or 5 Vector_TRQ to enable Vector control Encoder should be installed to the motor with Sub B board in the inverter to start this control Parameter Name Code Description sage of Pulse Defines the method of pulse input with SUB B board in e Sianal EXT 12 mounted Vector control setting is valid only after this eee parameter is set to 1 Feed back Pulse Input Signal 3 types of pulse input A B A A B EXT 15 Selection Encoder Pulse Number EXT 16 Enters the pulse number of encoder in the motor Before selecting Vector contr
227. t None This code sets the application mode Setting Range Pe LCD 7 Seg Description None 0 Application mode is not selected Traverse mode is selected in application Traverse 1 group Related functions APP 02 07 are displayed MMC Multi Motor Control mode is MMC 2 selected in application group Related functions APP 08 31 are displayed DRAW mode is selected in application DRAW 3 group Related functions APP 32 33 are displayed Traverse This is a mechanism to wind thread to an intended shape on a reel with a rotary motion and reciprocation Adjusting the speed of mechanical reciprocation can make different shapes of thread reel The following figure shows an example The guide should move with low speed at the center of the reel and fast at the edge of the reel Related Functions APP 02 to APP 07 Traverse Parameters 1 0 12 to 1 0 14 Multi Function Input EXT 30 to EXT 32 Multi Function Output 145 Chapter 6 Parameter Description APP Thread Ze N Traverse Traverse ve l Thread Rotary Reciprocation Constant Motion Mechanical Speed An example of Traverse Operation AS APP 03 Trv Scr APP 02 Trv Amp APP 06 Offset High Reference Speed APP 07 Offset Low APP 04 APP 05 Traverse Acc Traverse Dec Traverse Operation Pattern MMC The PID control should be selected in FU2 47 to use this function One inverter
228. t Time Dwell Operation FU2 gt Jump freq 10 No 10 0 Factory Default No 0 FU2 jump lo 1 Lil 10 00 Hz 10 00 Factory Default 10 00 Hz 10 00 FU2 Jump Hi 1 12 15 00 Hz 12 15 00 Factory Default 15 00 Hz 15 00 FU2 jump lo 3 15 30 00 Hz 15 30 00 Factory Default 30 00 Hz 30 00 FU2 Jump Hi 3 16 35 00 Hz 16 35 00 Factory Default 35 00 Hz 35 00 To prevent undesirable resonance and vibration on the structure of the machine this function locks out the potential resonance frequency from occurring Three different jump frequency ranges may be set This avoidance of frequencies does not occur during accelerating or decelerating It only occurs during continuous operation Output Frequency A Freq Max FU2 12 FU2 11 FU2 14 FU2 13 FU2 16 FU2 15 Reference gt Frequency 10Hz 20Hz 30Hz Frequency Jump t Note When the reference frequency is set inside the jump frequency the output frequency goes to the frequency marked by symbol Note If one frequency jump range is required set all ranges to the same range FU2 17 Start Curve for S Curve Accel Decel Pattern FU2 18 End Curve for S Curve Accel Decel Pattern Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 FU2 19 Input Output Phase Loss Protection Bit Set FU2 gt Trip select 19 00 19 00 Factory Default 00 00 This function is used to cut the inverter ou
229. t status of control terminals 24 30 00 Hz 24 30 00 Factory Default 30 00 Hz 30 00 I O Out status ie ae 16 0000 Factory Default 0000 These codes set the step frequencies These 12 O Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O frequencies are applied when the multi function input f the Jog terminal is ON inverter operates to Jog terminals P1 P2 P3 RST BX JOG FX and RX select frequency regardless of other terminal inputs the step See Speed L Speed M Speed H Speed X in 0 12 14 1 0 33 Related Functions DRV 04 Frequency mode ae DRV 05 DRV 07 Step Frequency 1 3 1 0 12 14 93 97 Multi function inputs 1 0 17 Filtering Time Constant gt Time Step Spd H Spd Spd L Jog Freq Code SIX o lea Pt Ter Step DRV 00 0 0 0 0 0 2A Freq 0 Step i Step Step dee al pa da A ee AS y RA A x x x p1 cm ON ON ON ON s Step E a gt lime DRV 05 0 0 0 1 0 po o E Freq 1 P2 CM ON ON ie ode F 7 F F 7 gt Time Step DRV 06 0 0 4 0 A E A H i E a Freq 2 P3 CM gt Time A i Step j DRV 07 0 0 1 1 0 JOG CM ON Freq 3 koo gt Time S i i ie 0 21 0 1 0 0 0 PXOM oN gt Time Freq 4 E e E EEE e E p RX CM ON See l on
230. t the frequency reference 0 10V to v1 2 the V1 control terminal Refer to the I O 01 to 1 0 05 for scaling the signal Input the frequency reference 4 20mA 3 to the I control terminal Refer to the 1 0 06 to 1 O 10 for scaling the signal Input the frequency reference 0 10V V1 l 4 4 20mA to the V1 control terminals The V1 signal overrides the T signal 82 Chapter 6 Parameter Description DRV Output Frequency DRV 05 DRV 07 Step Frequency 1 3 Freq MAX heee DRV gt Step freq 1 05 10 00 Hz 05 10 00 Reference Freq Range Factory Default 10 00 Hz 10 00 Analog Signal OV 10V Input V1 DRV gt Step freq 2 06 a e 06 20 00 Freq Mode V1 Factory Default 20 00 Hz 20 00 DRV Step freg 3 Output Frequency A 07 30 00 Hz 07 30 00 Freq Max ooo Factory Default 30 00 Hz 30 00 Reference Freq Range i The inverter outputs preset frequencies set in these codes according to the multi function terminals configured as Speed L Speed M and Speed H The output frequencies are decided by the binary Freq Mode P combination of P1 P2 P3 configured in I O 12 to 1 0 17 Refer to the following table for the preset frequency outputs Analog Signal 4mA 20mA Input 1 Output Frequency A Binary Combination of Freq Max P1
231. t to use Jog operation terminal when ON Output Frequency f Sequence 1 po Sequence 2 FX lt lt _ _ gt e a SEQ2 2F This function is set to issue Forward Run SEQ1 2F SEQ2 1F SEQ1 1F RX This function is set to issue Reverse Run gt Time Ana Change 8 e Inverter changes its frequency reference source from V1 P1 CM e SEQ ON hos to when ON P2 CM gt Pre excite SEQM gt Time This setting switches the inverter in pre exciting state P3 CMf a when assignning Pre excite to the desired terminal This Hold step gt Time function applies only the exciting current to a motor in Hold step in Auto A Operation Sensorless_S control In Vector_SPD control the inverter conducts pre exciting to start a motor after the magnetic flux is established and holding torque even 200 of motor nominal torque is guaranteed When the operation command is set to ON the state changes from pre exciting to normal 125 Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O 1 0 LCD Keypad Display ME E Output AXA AXC Q3 Q2 Q1 ld D_E Terminals Bit 3 Bit2 Bit1 BitO A Pre excitating OFF status 0 0 0 0 ON status 1 1 1 1 7 Segment Keypad Display The JOG terminal is not displayed on 7 Segment keypad Spd Trq Speed or Torque mode select in Vector control ON status HIM MA Disabled
232. te the error of a system integrally This is used to compensate the steady state error by accumulating them Using this control alone makes the system unstable PI control This control is stable in many systems If D control is added it becomes the 3 order system In some systems this may lead to system instability D Control Since the D control uses the variation ratio of error it has the merit of controlling the error before the error is too large The D control requires a large control quantity at start but has the tendency of increasing the stability of the system This control does not affect the steady state error directly but increases the system gain because it has an attenuation effect on the system As a result the differential control component has an effect on decreasing the steady state error Since the D control operates on the error signal it cannot be used alone Always use it with the P control or PI control Related Functions DRV 04 Frequency Mode FU2 40 Control Method 1 0 01 1 0 10 Analog Signal Scaling EXT 15 EXT 21 Pulse Input Signals Chapter 5 Parameter Description FU2 PID Control Block Diagram 2 60 PID output direction Target PID Ref setting Freq Mode Keypad 1 Keypad 2 ELE V2 ne o 1 2 Aux Ref Mode 8 3 4 5 Keypad 1 gt Keypad 2 eypa A Lo Lo Lo Aux Ref Mode PID FBK
233. ted during PID control FU2 57 PID Output Inversion FU2 58 PID Output Scale FU2 59 PID P2 Gain FU2 60 P Gain Scale FU2 gt PID Out Inv 57 No 37 Factory Default No This code is used to invert PID controller output FU2PPID Out Scale 58 100 0 58 100 0 Factory Default 10003 100 0 This code sets the scale of PID controller output FU2 PID P2 gain 59 100 0 59 100 0 Factory Default 100 0 100 0 This code sets the second P Gain for PID control FU2 gt P gain Scale 60 100 0 60 100 0 Factory Default 100 0 100 0 1 1 Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU2 This code sets the scale of P Gain and P2 Gain FU2 52 FU2 59 e PID output value can be set to 0 by setting a multi function input terminal P1 P6 to Open loop in 1 0 12 1 0 14 or EXT 02 EXT 04 The accumulated value by Gain can be set to 0 by setting a multi function input terminal P1 P6 to Term Clear in 1 0 12 1 0 14 or EXT 02 EXT 04 The second P Gain can be selected for PID controller by setting a multi function input 1 0 12 1 014 or EXT 02 EXT 04 to Open loop P Control This is to compensate the error of a system proportionally This is used to make the controller response fast for an error When P control is used alone the system is easily affected by an external disturbance during steady state I Control This is to compensa
234. tem Applicable Inverter SV S5 series Converter Converter equipped with RS232 Number of connectable Inverter 31 Max Transmission Distance Max 1200m Within 700m is desired Hardware Specification Category Specification Installation Install on the Control Board of Inverter using option connector CN2 Power Control Board Powered by Inverter Supply Communication Board Powered by Control Board Power Isolated Power Communication Specification Category Specification Communication Speed 19200 9600 4800 2400 19200 bps User Selectable Control Procedure Asynchronous Communication System Communication System Half duplex system Character System ASCII 8 bit Stop Bit Length 1 bit Error Check CRC16 2 byte Parity check None 7 44 12Bit Binary DI Input Category Specification BIT Digital 12Bit input Communication Install on the Control Board of Inverter using option connector CN2 Power Control Board Powered by Inverter Supply 24V Power Powered by Inverter 24V using connector 7 4 5 Installing Option Board Connect the option board to Control board using Connector CN2 Option board Control board 164 Chapter 7 Options 7 5 Keypad The iS5 series has two kind of keypad for convenience 7 5 1 LCD Keypad Weight 140g Unit mm LC 20
235. to Yes PID operation is disabled and Control Mode FU2 47 is changed to V F PID Bypass is available only when Freq Mode DRV 04 is set to V1 1 or V2 The level in a tank can be checked in APP 30 Actual Value and APP 31 Actual Percent Output Frequency Max Freq Starting Freg Water Level in H min a Tank RUN S A STOP Main Motor RUN pot STOP Aux Motor Aux Motor Start Stop without PID Control APP 23 Sleep Delay Time APP 24 Sleep Frequency APP 25 Wake Up Level APP Sleep Delay 23 60 0 sec 23 60 0 Factory Default 60 0 sec 60 0 APP Sleep Freq 24 0 19 Hz 24 0 19 Factory Default 0 19 Hz 0 19 APP WakeUp level 25 35 25 35 Factory Default 35 35 Sleep function is initiated when flow demand is low Inverter stops motor when the motor runs below Sleep Frequency APP 24 during Sleep Delay Time APP 23 While in the sleep state inverter keeps monitoring and initiates Wake Up function when the real value of the controlling amount has decreased below the Wake Up level APP 25 Chapter 6 Parameter Description APP Note Sleep function is not operated if the Sleep Delay Time APP 23 is set to 0 Actual Value A Wakeup level APP25 gt Time Output Frequenc o y A A A a EEEE t lt APP23 APP23 Sleep freq APP24 Time Motor Stop Start Sleep Operation AP
236. to Desired Code FU Jump code 00 I Factory Default 1 Jumping directly to any parameter code can be accomplished by entering the desired code number This code is available only with LCD keypad FU1 03 Run Prevention FU1 gt Run prev 03 None Factory Default None This function prevents reverse operation of the motor This function may be used for loads that rotate only in one direction such as fans and pumps Setting Range oer LCD 7 Seg Description None 0 Forward and Reverse run is available Forward Prev 1 Reverse Prev 2 Forward run is prevented Reverse run is prevented FU1 05 Acceleration Pattern FU1 06 Deceleration Pattern FU1PAcc pattern 05 Linear 05 0 Factory Default Linear 0 FU bDec pattern 06 Linear 06 0 Factory Default Linear 0 Chapter 6 Parameter Description FU1 Different combinations of acceleration and deceleration patterns can be selected according to the application Setting Range LCD 7 Seg Description Linear 0 This is a general pattern for constant torque applications S curve This pattern allows the motor to accelerate and decelerate smoothly The actual acceleration and deceleration time takes longer about 40 than the time set in DRV 01 and DRV 02 This setting prevents shock during acceleration and deceleration and prevents objects from swinging on conveyors or ot
237. to iS5 series inverters that have a Type B configuration power terminal strip TIE EA Ol 3 Phase Power Input Dynamic Braking Resistor Figure 2 Type B Dynamic Braking Resistor Installation HI E 3 Phase Power Input Dynamic Braking Unit Figure 3 Type B Additional Dynamic Braking Unit and Resistor Installation 15 Chapter 1 Installation 1 7 3 Type C Configuration A Dynamic Braking Unit or a DC Bus Choke or both of them may be added to S5 series inverters that have a Type A Configuration power terminal strip i Jumper Between P1 and P2 Must Be Removed in Order to Install a DC Bus Choke DIL Ly 3 Phase Power Input Dynamic Braking Unit Dynamic Braking Resistor DC Bus Choke remove to wire DC Reactor Figure 4 Type C Dynamic Braking Unit DC Bus Choke Installation Tee Tee 3 Phase Power Input Dynamic Braking Resistor Figure 5 Type C Dynamic Braking Resistor 1 7 4 Type D Configuration PERRAS 3 Phase uso Power Input Dynamic Braking Unit DC Bus Choke remove to wire DC Reactor Figure 6 Type D Dynamic Braking Unit DC Bus Choke Installation 16 Chapter 1 Installation A WARNING Normal stray capacitance between the inverter chassis and the power devices inside the inverter and AC line can provide a high impedance shock hazard Do not apply power to the inverter if the inverter frame Power terminal G
238. tput off in case of phase loss in either input power or inverter output FU2 19 Phase Loss Protection Select FU2 Start Curve 17 40 amp 1 40 Factory Default 40 40 FU2 gt End Curve 18 40 amp 18 40 Factory Default 40 40 This parameter is used to adjust the Accel and Decel pattern when S Curve is selected in FU1 05 and FU1 06 respectively To use this function the Reference Frequency for Accel and Decel set in FU2 70 should be set to Delta freq Output Frequency A AH Time FU2 17 e FU2 18 e FU2 17 FU2 18 Linear p Linear S Curve Adjustment Actual Accel Time DRV 01 DRV 01 FU2 17 2 DRV 01 FU2 18 2 Actual Decel Time DRV 02 DRV 02 FU2 17 2 DRV 02 FU2 18 2 Ex If DRV 10 1 sec FU2 17 40 FU2 18 20 Actual Accel Time 1 sec 1sec 0 4 2 1sec 0 2 2 1 3 sec 101 Setting Range yg Description 0 0 00 Phase loss protection does not work 1 01 Protect inverter from output phase loss 1 0 10 __ Protect inverter from input phase loss 1 1 11 Protect inverter from input and output phase loss Related Functions FU2 22 to FU2 25 Speed Search FU2 20 Power ON Start Selection FU2 gt Power on run 20 No 20 0 Factory Default No 0 If FUN 20 is set to No restart the inverter by cycling the FX or RX terminal to CM terminal after power has been restored If FUN 20 is set to Yes
239. trol mode Sensorless_T Vector _SPD Vector_TRQ No All FU2 40 Auto Tuning Auto tuning Rs Lsigma Enc Test Tr Leakage Inductance of FU2 42 0 to depend on FU2 30 mH 0 001 Motor Stator Inductance of FU2 43 0 to depend on FU2 30 mH Motor E 19 The rated motor is automatically set according to the inverter model name If different set the motor capacity connected z No Load Motor Current Noload Curr 0 5 to 200 A Zz o Rated Motor Slip Rated Slip 0 t 010 Hz Rated Motor Current RMS Rated Curr 1 to 200 A o laa elo jo jo 106 Stator Resistance of FU2 4121 Motor 0 to depend on FU2 30 ohm 0 001 otor 20 This value is automatically entered according to the rated motor set in FU2 30 If different set the correct value of the motor 21 Code FU2 41 through FU2 46 appears only when FU2 39 is set to Sensorless_X or Vector_XXX 22 This value is automatically entered according to the rated motor set in FU2 30 If different set the correct value of the motor 61 Chapter 5 Parameter List FU2 44 Rotor Time Constant P Gain for Sensorless FU2 45 Control Gain for Sensorless SL P gain FU SL I gain Control FU2 47 PID Operation Selection Proc Pl mode FU2 482 PID F Gain PID F gain PID Auxiliary Reference Mode Selection PID Output Direction Selection PID Feedback Signal Selection P Gain for PID Control Gain for PID Control D Gain for PID Control
240. tting Run I l y1 Speed signal input I 0 10V I I I i Speed signal input I I 4 20mA 2500hm I i 1 i 5G Common for i i cm eR V1 1 l Speed signal Input f I 1 ae l Control Circuit I 1 O Main Gircuit Terminals Control Circuit Terminals 1 The terminal configuration varies depend on the model number Please refer to the 1 7 Power terminals 2 Analog output voltage is adjustable up to 12V 3 Analog speed command may be set by Voltage Current or both 4 The Common Busbar between P1 L1 and P2 L2 must be removed before installing DC Reactor 5 1 10 HP inverters have built in braking circuit Braking resistors are only included for 1 5HP inverters 15 30HP inverters have built in DB unit 15 100 HP inverters need optional braking unit and resistor 6 In case of 40 HP or more than the terminal is CM terminal which has same electric potential with Common Terminal 13 Chapter 1 Installation 1 7 Power Terminals m Type A Configuration 1 5 HP 230 460 480V E Oo E DB Resistor integrated als repo et pee wo m Type B Configuration 7 5 10 HP 230 460 480V ER Es trie trp Pet pee pu m Type C Configuration 15 30 HP 230 460 480V ERPs tte pe peep pe m Type C Configuration 15 30 HP 230 460 480V Built in DBU model PR Es trp spe pet pe pu wo Type D Configuration 40 75 HP 230V 40 100 HP 460 480V aa eR Es lesa ee N Jumper should be removed to connect a D
241. uctuation by using the encoder feedback Set the encoder pulse method and the number of pulse in EXT 15 and 16 Main speed is set in DRV 04 Frequency mode The encoder pulse related functions must be set correctly for better performance in EXT 15 EXT 24 138 EXT 21 EXT 19 gt EXT 18 EXT 20 Reference Frequency vs Pulse Input EXT 13 Real Speed Direction Sub B EXT RealSpdDir 13 RX 13 0 Factory Default Reverse 0 It displays actual motor rotation direction regardless of control mode selected when Sub B board is installed and EXT 12 is set to Feed back Chapter 6 Parameter Description EXT This is the filtering time constant of pulse input signal This is used to make the inverter respond slowly to the pulse input signal when the EXT 14 is set to Reference EXT 18 EXT 21 Pulse Input Signal Adjustment Sub B EXT 14 Encoder Feedback Frequency Sub B EXT ENC FeedBac 14 0 00 Hz 14 0 00 Factory Default N A It displays frequency regardless of control mode selected when Sub B board is installed and EXT 12 is set to Feed back EXT F pulse xl EXT 15 Pulse Input Signal Selection Sub B EXT F pulse set 15 A B 15 0 Factory Default A B 0 This code sets the encoder pulse to use A B uses two encoder signal lines of A and B and A uses one encoder signal line of A or B EXT 16 Encoder Pu
242. ult Hz Hz Set this parameter to 0 Hz to display frequency or to 1 Rpm to display speed Related Functions Changing the Hz Rpm display affects the following parameter display DRV 00 05 06 07 14 FU1 20 21 22 24 25 32 FU2 32 1 0 03 05 08 10 20 21 22 23 24 42 43 EXT 08 10 DRV 20 FU1 Group Selection 7 Segment keypad DRV 21 FU2 Group Selection 7 Segment keypad DRV 22 I O Group Selection 7 Segment keypad DRV 14 Command Output Frequency Display LCD Keypad DRVPTAR 14 OUT 0 00Hz 0 00Hz Factory Default 0 00Hz This code shows the Command Target Frequency set in DRVOO and inverter Output Frequency DRV 15 Reference Feedback Frequency Display LCD Keypad DRVPREF 0 00Hz 15 EBK 0 00Hz Factory Default 0 00Hz This code shows the Reference Frequency and Feedback Frequency while PID operation This code appears only when PID is selected in FU2 47 DRV 23 EXT Group Selection 7 Segment keypad DRV 24 COM Group Selection 7 Segment keypad DRV 25 APP Group Selection 7 Segment keypad Select the desired group and press the PROG ENT key to move into the desired group The parameter in the group can be read and written after moving into the desired group Chapter 6 Parameter Description DRV Notes 86 6 2 Function 1 Group FU1 FU1 00 Jump
243. until times out XCELH 5 Multi accel decel High Dc brake 6 DC injection braking during stop Command frequency can be issued as Rpm when 2nd Func 7 Exchange to 2 functions setting rpm in DRV 16 Hz Rpm Display and as Torque Exchange 8 Exchange to commercial power line reference when FU2 39 Control Mode Select Torque aia Sp dive for future use reference sets as the percentage of Rated Torque DOWA 11 Down drive Current 3 Wire 12 3 wire operation Ext Trip A 13 External trip A Note 1 0 48 and 1 0 49 also apply when DRV 04 is set Ext Trip B 14 External trip B to Keypad 1 or Keypad 2 for determining the loss of iTerm Clear 13 ze for PP eono a xchange between PID mode an command frequency Open loop 16 IVF mode Related Functions DRV 04 Frequency Mode Main drive 17 Exchange between Option and 1 0 02 V1 Input Minimum Voltage Inverter 1 0 07 I Input Minimum Current Analog hold 18 Hold the analog input signal 1 0 48 Lost command XCEL stop 19 Disable accel and decel 49 Time out P Gain2 20 Used for PID control SEQ L 21 Sequence operation Low SEQ M 22 Sequence operation Mid SEQ H 23 Sequence operation High 1 0 12 14 93 97 Multi function Input Terminal VEN 24 Exchange between Sequence P4 P2 P3 RST BX JOG FX RX Define lat operation and Manual operation Triggering Sequence operation Go step 25 Auto B 1 0 gt P1 define Hold step 26 Hold last step Auto A 12
244. ut gt Time Exchange AXA AXC ON gt Time AXA AXC configured as LV 131 Chapter 6 Parameter Description I O Ssearch Seq pulse AXA AXC is CLOSED during the inverter is speed When Auto Sequence operation is selected in I O 50 searching AXA AXC outputs pulse signals on the last step Step pulse Output Frequency When Auto Sequence operation is selected in I O 50 AXA AXC outputs pulse signals on every step Seq 2F Related Functions 1 0 50 I O 84 Auto Operation Seq 1F Output Frequency gt Time i Sequence 1 Sequence3 Sequence 2 SEQ1 2F l SEQ2 2F Seg 3F SEQ1 1F DRV 02 AXA AXC SEQ3 2F pos el mm a SEQ3 1F Minimum 100msec AXA AXC configured as Step pulse P1 CM SEQL En gt Time Ready P2 CM e AXA AXC is CLOSED when the inverter is ready to run SEQM _ gt Time P3 CMt l Trv ACC Go step ON JON JON ON ON gt Time CLOSED when output frequency reaches Accel A ON N N oN oe Step pulse gt Ti Time rv DEC gt A Minimum 100msec CLOSED when output frequency reaches Decel frequency AXA AXC configured as Step pulse MMC Automatically set to MMC when MMC is selected in APP 01 Zspd Dect 0 rpm detection signal in Vector Control Torq Dect Torque detection signal in Vector and Sensorless Vector Control 132
245. ut inverter output voltage The output value is determined by LM Output Voltage Output voltage Max output voltage x 10V x FM output gain 1 0 41 100 DC link vtg LM terminal outputs the DC link voltage of inverter The output value is determined by LM Output Voltage DC link voltage Max DC link voltage x 10V x FM output gain 1 0 41 100 Torque FM terminal outputs the motor torque The output value is determined by FM terminal output voltage Torque current Rated torque current X10V X FM output gain 1 0 41 150 14 Related Functions Chapter 6 Parameter Description EXT LM Terminal Output ise 0 10V gt Time 500Hz 2msec fixed LM Output LM CM terminal 1 0 40 1 0 41 FM Output EXT 40 AM1 Analog Meter 1 Output Sub C EXT 41 AM1 Adjustment EXT 42 AM2 Analog Meter 2 Output Sub C EXT 43 AM2 Adjustment These terminals are provided on Sub C board EXT gt AM1 mode 40 Frequency 40 0 Factory Default Frequency 0 EXT AM1 Adjust 41 100 m 100 Factory Default 100 100 EXT AM2 mode 42 3 42 DC link Vtg Factory Default DC link Vtg 3 EXT gt AM2 Adjust 43 100 43 100 Factory Default 100 100 Analog meter displays the inverter output Frequency Current Voltage DC link voltage and Torque with analog voltage on the AM1 and AM2 terminals of Sub C board The output voltage range
246. utput Frequency Limit FU1 23 25 Frequency Upper Lower Limit 1 0 01 10 Analog Frequency Setting Motor Overheat Protection FU1 50 53 Electronic Thermal FU2 30 Rated Motor Multi Step Operation 1 0 12 14 Define the Multi Function Input Terminals 1 0 20 27 Jog Multi Step Frequency FU1 23 25 Frequency Upper Lower Limit Jog Operation 1 0 20 Jog Frequency Frequency Jump Operation FU2 10 16 Frequency Jump Timing the Electronic Brake Operation 1 0 42 43 Frequency Detection Level 1 0 44 Multi Function Output i DRV 04 Motor Speed Displaying the Rotating Speed FU2 74 Motor RPM Display Gain Function Alteration Prevention FU2 94 Parameter Lock Energy Saving FU1 39 Energy Saving Auto Restart Operation After Alarm Stop FU2 27 28 Auto Retry 2nd Motor Operation FU2 81 90 2 4 Function PID Feedback Operation FU2 50 54 PID Operation Frequency Reference Signal and Output Adjusting 1 0 01 10 Analog Frequency Setting Define the Multi Function Input Terminals 1 0 12 14 Define the Multi Function Input Terminals Define the Multi Function Input Terminals 1 0 44 Multi Function Auxiliary Contact Output Setting Commercial Line gt inverter Switchover Operation 1 0 12 14 Define the Multi Function Input Terminals 1 0 44 Multi Function Auxiliary Contact Output Setting Frequency Meter Calibration 1 0 40 41 F
247. utput terminals O Undo the U V and W connections and Over 5M Q 500V class Resistor and the ground terminal tie the motor wiring Megger Es Note Values in is for the 400V class inverters 188 APPENDIX A FUNCTIONS BASED ON USE Set the function properly according to the load and operating conditions Application and related functions are listed in the following table Use Related Parameter Code Accel Decel Time Pattern Adjustment DRV 01 Acceleration Time DRV 02 Deceleration Time FU1 05 Acceleration Pattern FU1 06 Deceleration Pattern Reverse Rotation Prevention FU1 03 Forward Reverse Prevention Minimum Accel Decel Time FU1 05 Acceleration Pattern FU1 06 Deceleration Pattern Accel Decel at Continuous Rating Range FU1 05 Acceleration Pattern FU1 06 Deceleration Pattern Braking Operation Adjustment FU1 07 Stop Method FU1 08 11 DC Braking FU1 12 13 DC braking at start Operations for Frequencies Over 60 Hz FU1 20 Maximum Frequency FU1 25 Frequency Upper Limit 1 0 05 Frequency Corresponding to Max Voltage of V1 1 0 10 Frequency Corresponding to Max Current of I Selecting an Appropriate Output Characteristics for the Load FU1 20 Maximum Frequency FU1 21 Base Frequency Motor Output Torque Adjustment FU1 22 Starting Frequency FU1 26 28 Torque Boost FU1 59 60 Stall Prevention FU2 30 Rated Motor O
248. x166 FS 3 SV008iS5 4 0 8kW SV015iS5 4 TSW FE T006 x 6A 380 VAC 0 5A 27A 250x110 x60 238 x 76 FS 2 V022iS5 4 2 2kW SUSA Sn PE TO12 x 12A 380 VAC 0 54 27A 250x110 x60 238 x 76 FS 2 SV055iS5 4 5 5kW SHA Faq FE TOSO x 30A 380 VAC 0 5A 27A 270x140 x60 258 x 106 FS 2 SV110iS5 4 11kW SVIA ray FE T050 x 50A 380VAC 0 5A 27A 270x140x90 258 x 106 FS 2 SV185iS5 4 18kW FE T060 x 60A S80VAC 0 5A 27A 270x140 x90 258 x 106 FS 2 SV220iS5 4 22kw FE T070 x 70A 380VAC 0 5A 27A 350x 180 x90 338 x 146 FS 2 x 1 Industrial environment EN 50081 0 A class gt EN 61000 6 4 02 2 Domestic and industrial environment EN 50081 1 B class gt EN 61000 6 3 02 197 EMI RFI POWER LINE FILTERS INTERNATIONAL CAPACITORS RFI Filters Standard iS5 SERIES iS5 series l VARIADOR INVERTER Standard Filters CORRIENTE DE FUGAS LEAKAGE CURRENT Filtros Est ndar CODIGO CODE CHOQUES DE SALIDA OUTPUT CHOKES TORNILLOS DE FIJACION MOUNT INTENS CURRENT TENSION VOLTAGE POT POWER PESO WEIGHT DIMENSIONES MONTAJE DIMENSIONS MOUNTING LW HY X TRIFASICOS V300iS5 2 THREE PHASE FE T150 2 250VAC NOM MAX 480 x 200 x 160 468 x 166 SV370iS5 2 FE T170 2 250VAC 480 x 200 x 160 468 x 166 SV450iS5 2 FE T230 2 250VAC 580 x 250 x 205 560 x 170 SV550iS5 2 FE T280 2 250VAC 580 x 250 x 205 560 x 170 SV30
249. ypass Selection APP 19 Delay Time before Operating Aux Motor APP 20 Delay Time before Stopping Aux Motor APP gt Aux Start DT 19 60 0 sec 19 60 0 Factory Default 60 0 sec 60 0 Sets the time the inverter waits before starting the auxiliary motors APP gt Aux Stop DT 20 60 0 sec 20 60 0 Factory Default 60 0 sec 60 0 Sets the time the inverter waits before stopping the auxiliary motors 00 APP Regul Bypass 22 33 NO a 22 0 Factory Default No 0 This is used to bypass the PID operation selected in FU2 47 Select this code to Yes when using MMC function without PID control The frequency is determined by real value of control amount instead PID controller output The real value is also used as the Start Stop reference of Aux motors The following figure shows the running pattern with this function applied for controlling the flow rate of a tank To control the flow rate according to the water level of a tank divide the water level of the tank into the region to the number of Aux motors plus one and map each region from staring frequency to maximum frequency The inverter increases output frequency to lower the water level in the tank when the water level in the tank rises When reaching maximum frequency inverter connects aux motors connected directly to commercial line After connecting aux motor inverter starts again from the starting frequency By selecting APP 22

iS5 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents